522145
225
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/250
Next page
i
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
How to discard this product
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal
in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the
correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of
battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd
and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the fin-
ished batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws.
In the other countries
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can
increase when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.
This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong oper-
ation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
Save this manual for future reference.
Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
cancel the warranty.
SD, SDHC, SDXC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
Windows is registered trademark or trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
iPhone, iPod and iPad are registered trademark or trademark of the Apple.
All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their re-
spective holders.
Cd
ii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
CAUTION
Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action
WARNING
CAUTION
The front panel is made of glass.
Handle it with care.
Injury can result if the glass breaks.
Read these safety instructions before you operate the equipment.
Indicates a condition that can cause death or serious injury
if not avoided.
Indicates a condition that can cause minor or moderate
injury if not avoided.
The radar antenna sends the
electromagnetic radio frequency
(RF) energy. This energy can be
dangerous to you, especially
your eyes. Do not look at the
radiator or near the antenna
when the antenna is rotating.
The distances at which RF radiation
levels of 100 W/m
2
and 10 W/m
2
exist are shown in the table.
Antenna
Model
Distance to
100 W/m
2
point
Distance to
10 W/m
2
point
DRS25A
w/XN13A
DRS25A
w/XN12A
DRS12A
w/XN13A
DRS12A
w/XN12A
DRS6A
DRS4A
DRS4D
DRS2D
0.1 m
-
-
-
0.2 m
0.2 m
0.5 m
0.4 m
0.4 m
1.4 m
1.2 m
1.2 m
2.4 m
1.9 m
5.3 m
4.4 m
Check that no person is near the
radar antenna before you turn on
the radar.
Serious injury or death can occur if a
person is hit by a rotating radar
antenna.
Turn off the power immediately at
the switchboard if water leaks into
the equipment or smoke or fire is
coming from the equipment.
Failure to turn off the equipment can
cause fire or electrical shock.
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified persons can work inside
the equipment.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
iii
WARNING
Keep units other than the radar
antenna away from the rain and
water.
Fire or electrical shock can occur if
water gets inside the equipment.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Fire or electrical shock can occur if
the equipment is disassembled or
modified.
Do not operate the equipment with
wet hands.
Electrical shock can occur.
WARNING
Do not depend on one navigation
device for the navigation of the
vessel.
Always check your position against all
available aids to navigation, for the
safety of vessel and crew.
A radar is an excellent anti-collision
aid, but remember to keep watch for
possible collision conditions.
Always keep a watch while underway.
Do not leave any objects near the
radar antenna.
Fire, electrical shock or injury can
occur if something gets caught in the
radar antenna.
Use the correct fuse.
A wrong fuse can cause fire or serious
damage to the equipment.
Do not maneuver the vessel only
from the depth indication.
Grounding can occur.
The TFT LCD is constructed using the latest LCD techniques, and displays
99.99% of its pixels. The remaining 0.01% of the pixels may drop out or blink,
however this is not an indication of malfunction.
About the TFT LCD
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ....................................................................................................................x
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................xii
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................1-1
1.1 Controls...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Power ON and OFF ................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance of Display or Power Indicator ........................................ 1-6
1.4 How to Select a Display ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.5 SD Cards....................................................................................................................1-7
1.6 Chart Plotter Introduction ........................................................................................... 1-9
1.7 Radar Introduction.................................................................................................... 1-10
1.8 Sounder (Fish Finder) Introduction .......................................................................... 1-11
1.9 RotoKey Menus........................................................................................................ 1-12
1.10 Pop-up Menus.......................................................................................................... 1-13
1.11 Data Area (Data Box)............................................................................................... 1-13
1.11.1 How to set the data boxes............................................................................ 1-14
1.11.2 Data cycling.................................................................................................. 1-16
1.11.3 How to adjust transparency of the data box................................................. 1-17
1.12 Menu Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-17
1.13 [Display] Menu on the RotoKey Menu (TZT9/TZT14 only) ...................................... 1-20
1.14 Function Gesture on the Main Menu........................................................................ 1-20
1.15 Language ................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.16 Boat Icon ..................................................................................................................1-22
1.17 Man Overboard (MOB)............................................................................................. 1-22
1.18 Facsimile Receiver FAX-30...................................................................................... 1-25
1.19 AIS Transponder FA-30, FA-50 ............................................................................... 1-26
1.20 DSC Message Information ....................................................................................... 1-27
1.20.1 DSC notification ........................................................................................... 1-27
1.20.2 How to show or hide the DSC message information.................................... 1-27
1.20.3 How to go to a DSC point............................................................................. 1-27
1.20.4 How to display the DSC information ............................................................ 1-27
1.20.5 The DSC list ................................................................................................. 1-28
1.21 Wireless LAN Settings ............................................................................................. 1-29
1.22 Software Update ...................................................................................................... 1-33
1.23 Operation by Remote Control .................................................................................. 1-33
2. CHART PLOTTER .................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chart Type ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Chart Scale ................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Orientation Mode........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.4 How to Move the Chart .............................................................................................. 2-3
2.5 The Boat Icon............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.6 How to Find the Range and Bearing to a Location ................................................... 2-5
2.7 Chart Object Information ............................................................................................ 2-6
2.8 Multiple Chart Plotter Displays ................................................................................... 2-7
2.9 Cartographic Text and Objects on Vector Charts ...................................................... 2-8
2.9.1 Control visibility of text and object information............................................... 2-8
2.9.2 Control visibility of cartographic objects ......................................................... 2-9
2.10 Alarms ......................................................................................................................2-10
2.10.1 XTE alarm .................................................................................................... 2-11
2.10.2 Depth alarm.................................................................................................. 2-11
2.10.3 SST alarm .................................................................................................... 2-12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
v
2.10.4 Speed alarm .................................................................................................2-12
2.10.5 Anchor watch alarm......................................................................................2-13
2.10.6 Alarm menus ................................................................................................2-13
2.10.7 How to stop the alarm sound........................................................................2-14
2.11 Track.........................................................................................................................2-14
2.11.1 How to show or hide the track display..........................................................2-15
2.11.2 Track interval................................................................................................2-15
2.11.3 Track color....................................................................................................2-15
2.11.4 Track thickness ............................................................................................2-18
2.11.5 How to delete tracks.....................................................................................2-18
2.11.6 How to turn on the automatic deleting of tracks ...........................................2-19
2.11.7 How to record tracks ....................................................................................2-19
2.11.8 How to replay a saved track .........................................................................2-19
2.11.9 How to remove a replayed track...................................................................2-19
2.11.10Trackback.....................................................................................................2-19
2.12 NAVpilot-700 Series Auto Pilot.................................................................................2-21
2.12.1 How to show the NAVpilot-700 series data in the data boxes......................2-21
2.12.2 How to change the steering mode................................................................2-21
2.13 Plotter Display Menu ................................................................................................2-24
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS ....................................................................................3-1
3.1 3D Display ..................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Aerial view ......................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 How to activate the 3D display .......................................................................3-2
3.1.3 How to make the 3D view clearer...................................................................3-2
3.2 Overlays .....................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.1 Depth shading overlay....................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 Satellite photo overlay ....................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 Radar overlay .................................................................................................3-6
3.2.4 Tide icon overlay ............................................................................................3-7
3.2.5 Tidal current overlay.......................................................................................3-9
4. POINTS ..................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 About Points ...............................................................................................................4-1
4.2 How to Put a Point or an Event Mark .........................................................................4-1
4.2.1 How to put a point ..........................................................................................4-1
4.2.2 How to put an event mark ..............................................................................4-2
4.3 How to Display the Point Information .........................................................................4-2
4.4 Default Point Settings.................................................................................................4-3
4.5 How to Move a Point ..................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1 How to move a point on the screen................................................................4-5
4.5.2 How to move a point from the points list ........................................................4-5
4.6 How to Delete a Point.................................................................................................4-5
4.6.1 How to delete a point on the screen...............................................................4-5
4.6.2 How to delete a point from the points list .......................................................4-6
4.6.3 How to delete all points ..................................................................................4-6
4.7 How to Edit a Point .....................................................................................................4-6
4.7.1 How to edit a point on the screen...................................................................4-6
4.7.2 How to edit a point from the points list ...........................................................4-8
4.8 How to Find a Point ..................................................................................................4-10
4.9 How to Show or Hide All Points or Points Names ....................................................4-10
4.10 How to Go to a Point ................................................................................................4-10
4.10.1 How to go to an on-screen point ..................................................................4-11
4.10.2 How to go to a position selected on screen..................................................4-12
4.10.3 How to go to a point selected from the points list.........................................4-13
4.10.4 How to display the point information for the active route..............................4-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vi
4.11 How to Restart and Cancel Navigation to a Point .................................................... 4-14
4.11.1 How to restart navigation to a point.............................................................. 4-14
4.11.2 How to cancel navigation to a point ............................................................. 4-14
5. ROUTES.................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 What is a Route?........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 How to Create a Route............................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 How to create a new route ............................................................................. 5-1
5.2.2 How to create a new route from a point ......................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 How to insert a route point on a route............................................................ 5-3
5.2.4 How to move a route point on a route............................................................ 5-3
5.2.5 How to delete a point or route point on a route.............................................. 5-4
5.2.6 How to remove a point from a route............................................................... 5-4
5.2.7 How to extend a route.................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.8 How to split a route ........................................................................................ 5-5
5.3 Routes List .................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 How to Join Points to Create a Route ........................................................................ 5-7
5.5 How to Find a Route on the Chart.............................................................................. 5-7
5.6 How to Delete a Route ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.1 How to delete a route on the screen .............................................................. 5-8
5.6.2 How to delete a route from the routes list ...................................................... 5-8
5.6.3 How to delete all routes.................................................................................. 5-8
5.7 How to Show or Hide All Routes ................................................................................ 5-8
5.8 How to Follow a Route............................................................................................... 5-8
5.8.1 How to follow an on-screen route................................................................... 5-8
5.8.2 How to follow a route selected from the routes list......................................... 5-9
5.8.3 How to start navigation from a route point ................................................... 5-10
5.8.4 How to show the detailed information about a route.................................... 5-11
5.8.5 Flyover ......................................................................................................... 5-11
5.9 Operations When You Follow a Route..................................................................... 5-12
5.9.1 How to restart navigation ............................................................................. 5-12
5.9.2 How to follow a route in the reverse direction .............................................. 5-12
5.9.3 How to stop following a route....................................................................... 5-12
5.9.4 How to skip a go to point on a route............................................................. 5-12
5.9.5 Waypoint switching mode ............................................................................ 5-13
5.9.6 Route auto zoom.......................................................................................... 5-13
5.9.7 XTE lines...................................................................................................... 5-14
5.9.8 Waypoint arrival notification ......................................................................... 5-14
5.9.9 End of route notification ............................................................................... 5-14
5.10 Fuel Level................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.11 Routes Menu............................................................................................................ 5-15
6. RADAR...................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 How to Transmit, Set the Radar in Stand-by, Tune ................................................... 6-1
6.2 How to Adjust the Gain .............................................................................................. 6-2
6.3 How to Reduce the Sea Clutter.................................................................................. 6-3
6.4 How to Reduce the Rain Clutter................................................................................. 6-4
6.5 Range Scale............................................................................................................... 6-4
6.6 Orientation Mode........................................................................................................ 6-5
6.7 How to Measure the Range and Bearing from Your Ship to a Target........................ 6-6
6.7.1 How to display the range rings....................................................................... 6-6
6.7.2 How to set the number of the range rings...................................................... 6-6
6.7.3 How to select the range rings mode............................................................... 6-7
6.7.4 How to measure the range and bearing with the ruler ................................... 6-8
6.7.5 How to measure the range with the VRM ...................................................... 6-8
6.7.6 How to measure the bearing with the EBL..................................................... 6-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vii
6.7.7 How to select the EBL reference....................................................................6-9
6.8 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets .............................6-10
6.9 How to Off-center the Picture ...................................................................................6-10
6.10 Heading Line ............................................................................................................6-10
6.11 How to Reduce Radar Interference..........................................................................6-11
6.12 Guard Zone ..............................................................................................................6-11
6.12.1 How to set the guard zone ...........................................................................6-11
6.12.2 How to activate or deactivate the guard zone ..............................................6-11
6.12.3 How to hide the guard zone .........................................................................6-12
6.12.4 Guard zone menus.......................................................................................6-12
6.13 Watchman ................................................................................................................6-12
6.14 Echo Trails................................................................................................................6-13
6.14.1 How to show or hide echo trails ...................................................................6-13
6.14.2 How to clear echo trails to restart new echo trails........................................6-13
6.14.3 Echo trail time...............................................................................................6-13
6.14.4 Echo trail mode (reference)..........................................................................6-14
6.14.5 Echo trail color..............................................................................................6-14
6.14.6 Echo trail shading.........................................................................................6-15
6.15 Echo Stretch.............................................................................................................6-15
6.16 Echo Average...........................................................................................................6-15
6.17 Sweep Fade .............................................................................................................6-16
6.18 How to Show, Hide or Cancel an Active Route ........................................................6-16
6.19 How to Show or Hide the Boat Icon..........................................................................6-17
6.20 Echo Color................................................................................................................6-17
6.21 Background Color.....................................................................................................6-17
6.22 Radar Overlay Range Link .......................................................................................6-18
6.23 Dual-Range Display..................................................................................................6-18
6.24 FAR-2xx7 Radar Series and NavNet TZtouch .........................................................6-19
6.25 How to Understand the Radar Display .....................................................................6-20
6.25.1 False echoes ................................................................................................6-20
6.25.2 Search and rescue transponder (SART) ......................................................6-22
6.26 ARPA Operation.......................................................................................................6-23
6.26.1 How to show or hide the ARPA display........................................................6-23
6.26.2 How to manually acquire a target.................................................................6-23
6.26.3 How to automatically acquire a target ..........................................................6-24
6.26.4 How to display target data............................................................................6-25
6.26.5 How to stop tracking targets.........................................................................6-25
6.26.6 How to clear a lost target..............................................................................6-25
6.26.7 CPA/TCPA alarm .........................................................................................6-26
7. FISH FINDER.........................................................................................................7-1
7.1 How the Fish Finder Operates....................................................................................7-1
7.2 How to Select a Display..............................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Single frequency display ................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Dual frequency display ...................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 Zoom displays ................................................................................................7-3
7.2.4 A-scope display (display only)........................................................................7-5
7.2.5 Bottom discrimination display.........................................................................7-6
7.3 Automatic Fish Finder Operation................................................................................7-6
7.3.1 How the automatic fish finder operates ..........................................................7-6
7.3.2 How to select an automatic fish finder mode..................................................7-7
7.4 Manual Fish Finder Operation....................................................................................7-7
7.4.1 How to select the manual mode .....................................................................7-7
7.4.2 How to select the display range .....................................................................7-7
7.4.3 How to Shift the Range ..................................................................................7-8
7.4.4 How to adjust the gain....................................................................................7-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
viii
7.4.5 How to reduce the clutter ............................................................................... 7-8
7.5 Picture Advance Speed.............................................................................................. 7-9
7.6 How to Reduce Interference ......................................................................................7-9
7.7 How to Measure Range, Depth or Time to an Object .............................................. 7-10
7.8 How to Balance Echo Strength ................................................................................ 7-11
7.9 Fish Finder Alarms ................................................................................................... 7-11
7.9.1 How to set an alarm ..................................................................................... 7-11
7.9.2 How to activate or deactivate an alarm ........................................................ 7-12
7.9.3 Alarm sensitivity ........................................................................................... 7-13
7.10 ACCU-FISHTM ........................................................................................................ 7-13
7.10.1 How to set ACCU-FISHTM .......................................................................... 7-14
7.10.2 Fish size correction ...................................................................................... 7-15
7.10.3 How to turn the fish symbol indication on..................................................... 7-15
7.10.4 How to display the fish information ..............................................................7-15
7.11 How to Put a Point, Go To a Point or a Position ...................................................... 7-15
7.12 Fish Finder Menu Operation .................................................................................... 7-16
7.13 LCD Color Sounder FCV-1150 and NavNet
TZtouch7-19
7.14 Interpreting the Display ............................................................................................ 7-21
8. FILE OPERATIONS ...............................................................................................8-1
8.1 How to Format SD Cards ........................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Files Menu Operation................................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 File Format .................................................................................................................8-2
8.4 How to Export Points and Routes .............................................................................. 8-3
8.5 How to Import Points and Routes .............................................................................. 8-3
8.6 How to Import or Export Tracks ................................................................................. 8-4
8.7 How to Backup the Equipment Settings..................................................................... 8-5
8.8 How to Load the Equipment Settings......................................................................... 8-5
8.9 How to Copy the Equipment Settings ........................................................................ 8-6
8.10 How to Delete Points, Routes and Tracks ................................................................. 8-6
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link.............................................................................9-1
9.1 How to Display a Video Image ................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Video Signal Type ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 How to Set the Video Display..................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.1 How to select the input source....................................................................... 9-2
9.3.2 How to set each video signal ......................................................................... 9-2
9.3.3 How to adjust the image size ......................................................................... 9-4
9.3.4 How to cycle your video inputs....................................................................... 9-5
9.3.5 How to set the dwell time ............................................................................... 9-5
9.4 Pop-up Menus by the FLIR Camera .......................................................................... 9-6
9.5 How to Adjust the Video Image.................................................................................. 9-6
9.6 Touch Control on the Camera Display ....................................................................... 9-7
9.7 FUSION-Link.............................................................................................................. 9-8
10. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY......................................................................................10-1
10.1 How to Show the Instrument Display ....................................................................... 10-1
10.2 How to Select an Instrument Display ....................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Instrument Displays.................................................................................................. 10-2
10.3.1 Steering Display........................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Engine display.............................................................................................. 10-2
10.3.3 Tank level display......................................................................................... 10-3
10.3.4 Weather display ........................................................................................... 10-3
10.3.5 Wind display.................................................................................................10-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ix
11. WEATHER ...........................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Weather Display Introduction ...................................................................................11-1
11.2 NavCenter Weather..................................................................................................11-2
11.2.1 Pre-settings ..................................................................................................11-2
11.2.2 How to download the NavCenter data..........................................................11-3
11.2.3 How to display the NavCenter data..............................................................11-4
11.2.4 How to load a weather file ............................................................................11-5
11.3 Sirius Weather..........................................................................................................11-6
11.3.1 Pre-settings ..................................................................................................11-6
11.3.2 How to display the Sirius data ......................................................................11-7
11.4 Weather Icons (Sirius Weather) ...............................................................................11-8
11.5 Weather Data (NavCenter or Sirius).........................................................................11-9
11.6 Weather Reports ....................................................................................................11-14
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS).................................................12-1
12.1 AIS Introduction........................................................................................................12-1
12.2 How to Show or Hide the AIS Symbols ....................................................................12-1
12.3 AIS Target Symbols..................................................................................................12-1
12.4 Proximity AIS Target Alarm ......................................................................................12-2
12.5 How to Ignore the AIS Targets .................................................................................12-3
12.6 How to Display the Target Data................................................................................12-4
12.7 How to Show and Hide the Target IDs .....................................................................12-4
12.8 AIS List .....................................................................................................................12-5
12.9 How to Register an AIS or DSC to the Buddies List.................................................12-6
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS ............................................................................13-1
13.1 RotoKey Mode..........................................................................................................13-1
13.2 How to Set the Display Selection Window................................................................13-8
13.3 General and Units Menus.......................................................................................13-10
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................14-1
14.1 Maintenance.............................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Life of the Parts ........................................................................................................14-2
14.3 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................14-4
14.3.1 General troubleshooting ...............................................................................14-4
14.3.2 Radar troubleshooting ..................................................................................14-4
14.3.3 Chart plotter troubleshooting ........................................................................14-5
14.3.4 Fish finder troubleshooting ...........................................................................14-5
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1
APPENDIX 2 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION ............................................AP-8
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1
x
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the TZT9, TZT14 and TZTBB
Congratulations on your choice of the TZT9, TZT14 and TZTBB Multi Function Display, an integral
part of our new NavNet TZtouch series of multi-function displays. We are confident you will see
why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine envi-
ronment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly installed and
maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance procedures set forth
in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our pur-
poses.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The NavNet TZtouch series, equipped with a touch screen with multi touch capacity, is a net-
worked navigation system that gives you radar, chart plotter, fish finder, AIS receiver, etc. Infor-
mation is transferred between NavNet TZtouch units through Ethernet or CAN bus. The plug and
play format allows expansion and you can connect a maximum of six NavNet devices. Also, you
can remote-control the NavNet TZtouch units and display the data on an iPhone, iPod or iPad.
Main features
Intuitive touch control operation.
Remote-control of the equipment with iPhone, iPod or iPad.
Wireless LAN signal for connection to the internet.
Chart plotter
• TimeZero
TM
technology displays charts immediately with no load time.
Loaded with full scale, complete Mapmedia NOAA raster and vector charts for all the United
States.
3D display with controls for pitch and orientation.
Points (Waypoints), routes, tracks, etc. are transferred between NavNet TZtouch units through
the Ethernet.
Large memory stores 30,000 track points, 30,000 points, and 200 routes.
The overlay displays show depth shading, tide, tidal current, satellite photo (North America
only), etc.
FOREWORD
xi
Radar sensor (option)
The radar antennas are in radome or open-array type.
The radar echoes appear in green, yellow or multi-colors.
Automatic control of sea clutter, tuning and gain for easier operation.
Guard zone checks for targets within the area you indicate.
• ARPA provided standard.
Dual-range display for watch on short and long distances at the same time.
Fish finder (option)
Measures the depth to the bottom and displays underwater conditions in multi-colors according
to echo strength.
The zoom mode enlarges fish echoes.
Automatic and manual operation. Auto mode automatically adjusts range, gain and clutter ac-
cording to purpose, fishing or cruising.
• ACCU-FISH
TM
estimates length and depth of individual fish.
(Requires appropriate transducer and Bottom Discrimination Sounder BBDS1, Network Sound-
er DFF series.)
The bottom discrimination display helps identify probable bottom composition. (Requires Bot-
tom Discrimination Sounder BBDS1 or Network Fish Finder DFF1-UHD.)
Other
The AIS function receives AIS data from other ships, shore stations and navigational aids and
displays this data.
The DSC (Digital Selective Calling) message information feature provides the MMSI no. and po-
sition of ships that have transmitted a DSC message to you. (Requires DSC capable radiotele-
phone.)
USB port connects the plug and play USB devices (mouse, etc.).
Instrument displays (steering, engine, weather, and wind) with connection of the correct sen-
sors:
The weather information display available with connection of Sirius weather receiver.
You can download the latest weather data with internet connection.
The sensor data is transferred to units through the Ethernet or CAN bus.
IP camera (local supply) monitors activity on the ship.
CAN bus for the connection of GPS receiver, Weather Station, FI-50 (instrument series), Satel-
lite Compass, etc.
xii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Basic configuration is shown with solid line.
TZT9/14
Note: When you connect an external monitor to the TZT unit, use a monitor whose aspect ratio is
the same as the TZT unit (5:3 for TZT9, 16:10 for TZT14). The pictures may be stretched or shrunk
with a different aspect ratio.
RADAR SENSOR
DRS2D/DRS4D
OR
RADAR SENSOR
DRS4A/DRS6A/DRS12A/DRS25A
CCD Camera
CCD Camera
FI-5002
SC-30
GP-330/WS-200
FI-50, etc.
IF-NMEA2K1/2
Multi Function
Display
TZT9/TZT14
12/24 VDC
Event SW
External Buzzer
Speed Alarm
Power input for CAN bus
IP Camera
Echo Sounder
(FCV-1150, BBDS1, DFF series)
Environmental category
Sensor units: Exposed to the weather
All other units: Protected from the weather
NAVpilot-700
12-24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY UNIT*
PSU-017
*: The power supply unit is required when you connect the radar sensor.
PSU-012: w/DRS2D/4D/4A/6A/12A
PSU-013: w/DRS25A
PSU-017: w/DRS2D/4D
For details of the power supply unit, see the installation manual of the radar sensor (IME-35670).
HUB -101
FA-30/50
FAX-30
FUSION-Link Equipment
FAR-2xx7 series
Wide Monitor
Network Equipment
12-24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY UNIT*
PSU-012/PSU-013
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
xiii
TZTBB
Note 1: Do not connect or disconnect the DVI cable between TZTBB and the touch monitor while
TZTBB is powered.
Note 2: When connecting two monitors, resolutions and aspect should match between two mon-
itors. Both screens show same images (compatible with clone mode only).
RADAR SENSOR
DRS2D/DRS4D
OR
RADAR SENSOR
DRS4A/DRS6A/DRS12A/DRS25A
12-24 VDC
CCD Camera
CCD Camera
FI-5002
SC-30
GP-330/WS-200
FI-50, etc.
IF-NMEA2K1/2
12/24 VDC
Touch Monitor
Event SW
External Buzzer
Speed Alarm
Power input for CAN bus
HUB -101
FCV-1150, BBDS1, DFF series
FA-30/50
IP Camera
Environmental category
Sensor units: Exposed to the weather
All other units: Protected from the weather
FAX-30
NAVpilot-700
Touch Monitor
Switch Box
PSD-002
Processor Unit
MPU-002
12-24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY UNIT*
PSU-017
POWER SUPPLY UNIT*
PSU-012/PSU-013
*: The power supply unit is required when you connect the radar sensor.
PSU-012: w/DRS2D/4D/4A/6A/12A
PSU-013: w/DRS25A
PSU-017: w/DRS2D/4D
For details of the power supply unit, see the installation manual of the radar sensor (IME-35670).
FUSION-Link equipment
Network equipment
FAR-2xx7 series
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
xiv
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides the information necessary to get you started using your system.
Some of the topics are how to turn on the equipment and an introduction to the main
screens.
Standards used in this manual
TZT9/TZT14: There are three keys on the control panel: Home, RotoKey
TM
and
Power.
TZTBB: There is a power key on the switch box (PSD-002). The home key is dis-
played at the top right-hand corner of the screen as an icon ( ) instead of a key.
The TZTBB does not have a RotoKey
TM
.
The Home and RotoKey
TM
are shown in bold face. The power key is indicated as
key. Other items that appear on the screen with touch controls or the
RotoKey
TM
, are shown in brackets in normal typeface. For example, [Head Up].
The menu system has main menus and related sub menus.
How to operate the main menu
1. TZT9/TZT14: Press the Home key to display the menu icon bar (see
section 1.12).
TZTBB: Tap the Home icon at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
2. Select (tap) the [Menu] icon to open the main menu.
This manual states steps 1 and 2 as “Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to
open the main menu.”
3. Drag the main menus to display a menu desired. The selected menu is indicat-
ed with a yellow highlight. The sub menus for the selected menu appear (see
section 1.12).
When you are asked to select a menu item from the main menu, the name of the
main menu and sub menu are given, separated by a hyphen. For example, "Select
the [Routes] - [Default Route Color] menu".
This equipment has a RotoKey menu that gives you access to full control of the Nav-
Net TZtouch system.
How to operate the RotoKey menu
1. TZT9/TZT14: Push the RotoKey
TM
to open the RotoKey menu.
TZTBB: Tap the screen.
2. Select a menu item as follows:
TZT9/TZT14: Rotate the RotoKey
TM
to select a menu desired then push the
RotoKey
TM
to do the function.
TZT9/TZT14/TZTBB: Drag the RotoKey menu to display a menu desired
then select (tap) it to do the function marked on the menu item.
This manual states this operating procedure as "Select [menu name] from the
RotoKey menu.”
The colors mentioned for track, route, point, etc. are the default colors.
This manual states the operation for the home and Rotokey functions based on
TZT9/TZT14.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-2
Most of the screenshots in this manual are for TZT9/TZT14.
1.1 Controls
The TZT9/TZT14/TZTBB are operated by key(s) and touch control.
You operate the chart plotter, radar, fish finder, etc. with
• Key(s)
• Touch control
Menus, where you select options
Pop-up menus, where you select options
Lists, where you can edit items
When you operate a key, a single beep sounds. If you do not need the key beep, de-
activate the beep sound from the [General] - [Key Beep] menu of the main menu.
Key control description
The key controls of your system are in the figures shown below. The key controls are
illuminated for nighttime use.
TZT9
TZT14
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-3
TZTBB
Touch control description
The touch control depends on the screen type. The basic operations are in the tables
that follow.
Operation with a finger
No. Label Function
1 Turns the power on.
Adjusts the brilliance of the display.
Turns the power off. (Device or Network)
2 Card drive Card drive for memory cards.
3
RotoKey
TM
(TZT9/TZT14 only)
Push: Opens the RotoKey menu or validates the
selected item.
Rotate:
Selects an item on the RotoKey menu.
Selects the range scale on the chart plotter or
the radar screen.
4 Home
(For TZTBB, an icon is
displayed on the screen.)
Opens the display selection window.
Displays the menu icon bar.
Operation with a finger Function
Tap Opens the RotoKey menu
or validates the selected
item (TZTBB only).
Select a menu item.
Select an object or posi-
tion to display the corre-
sponding pop-up menu.
Drag • Pan the charts.
Scroll the menu.
1
2
4
Switch box (PSD-002)
Monitor
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-4
Operation with two fingers
Operation with two fingers Function
Pinch Zoom in or out the
chart scale in the 2D/
3D modes or weather
display.
Select radar range on
the radar display.
Drag Switch from 2D to 3D.
Orientate 3D view.
Tap Execute the function
which is selected in [Gen-
eral] - [Function Gesture]
of the main menu (see
section 1.14).
Rotate Switch between head up
and north up in the 2D/3D
modes.
Zoom in
Zoom out
Drag upward or downward.
or
Boat icon
Put one finger on the
boat icon then rotate
the other finger.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-5
For TZT9/TZT14, when both Rotokey
TM
and touch control are available for the same
function, this manual states the operation by touch control.
Notes for touch control
A large amount of waterdrops on the screen can cause misoperation and slow touch
response. Wipe the screen with a dry cloth to remove the water.
This equipment uses a capacitive touch screen. Tap the screen with your fingertips
directly. Do not use sharp objects (needle, pen, nail) or a stylus pen. Be careful not
to scratch the screen.
Do not tap the screen with gloved fingers. Misoperation or no response can result.
Do not put objects (stickies, etc.) on the screen. The touch control can fail to work
properly.
Keep the equipment away from a radio antenna, fluorescent light, solenoid valve or
other electronic devices to prevent false operation from noise.
The front panel is made of glass. If the front panel is damaged, do not try to repair
it yourself. Unauthorized repair will void the warranty. Contact your dealer about re-
pair or replacement.
For TZTBB, see the manuals for the touch monitor.
1.2 Power ON and OFF
Press the key to turn the power ON.
When you turn on the power, a beep
sounds and the start-up screen appears.
Approximately 90 seconds after you ap-
ply the power, the chart plotter display
appears.
To turn the power OFF, press the key. The following window appears.
Select [Power Off This Device] or [Power Off Network]. 15 seconds after the screen
goes blank, the power turns off. (The power is on for this 15 seconds.)
Note 1: Do not turn off the power during the start-up. Wait until the start-up is complet-
ed before you turn the power off.
Note 2: The screen refreshes slower in low ambient temperature.
TZTBB:
Press here.
TZT9/TZT14:
Press here.
Power Off
This Device
Close
Power Off
Network
Brilliance
Select either one
of the two.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-6
1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance of Display or Power
Indicator
Press the key to show the following window.
TZT9/TZT14: Drag the circle icon to adjust the display brilliance. The brilliance level is
indicated on the icon. You can also adjust the display brilliance with short press of the
key repeatedly.
TZTBB: Drag the circle icon to adjust the brilliance of the
power indicator and the backlighting for the key. The bril-
liance level is indicated on the icon. You can also adjust them
with short press of the key repeatedly.
1.4 How to Select a Display
Use the Home key (or icon) and the RotoKey
TM
(or touch control) to select a display,
from the display selection window.
1. Press the Home key (or tap the Home icon) to show the display selection window.
2. Do one of the following:
TZT9/TZT14: Rotate the RotoKey
TM
to put the required display in the monitor
area at the bottom of the screen then push the key.
TZT9/TZT14/TZTBB: Select (tap) the required display.
For details, see section 13.2.
Power Off
This Device
Close
Power Off
Network
Brilliance
TZT9/TZT14: Adjust the display brilliance.
TZTBB: Adjust the brilliance of the power indicator.
Close the window.
Power
indicator
Monitor
area
This icon appears
only when fusion
equipment is
connected.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-7
1.5 SD Cards
The SD card stores the tracks, routes, points, settings, etc. Set and remove SD cards
as shown below. The Secure Digital Extended Capacity (SDXC) cards can also be
used.
How to format an SD card
You do not normally need to format an SD card for use with the system. If the card
becomes corrupted, format the card with a formatting program that is compatible with
the specifications of the SD card. The SD Memory Card Formatting Software made by
Panasonic is an example.
How to set an SD card
1) Pull the tab on the card drive cover to open the card
drive.
2) As shown in the right figure, put the SD card in the
right card drive with the label right. If the card does
not set easily, do not use force.
Note: The left card drive has a cover.
3) Push the card until the card is in position.
How to remove an SD card
1) Pull the tab on the card drive cover to open the card drive.
2) Push the card to release the card from the card drive.
3) Remove the card with your fingers then close the cover.
About the SD cards
Use SD cards carefully. Wrong use can damage the card and
destroy its contents.
Make sure the cover is closed at all times.
Remove a card with only your fingers. Do not use metal instruments (like tweezers)
to remove the card.
Do not remove a card during the reading of the card or writing to the card.
If there is water at the bottom of the card cover, DO NOT open the cover. Remove
the water with a dry cloth completely and then open the cover.
TZT9/TZT14
TZTBB
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-8
The memory cards in the tables below have been tested:
Note: Use an SD card class 6 or above for storing chart data.
Type Capacity Maker
LSD64GCBJP133 64 GB Lexer
SD-E064GUA 64 GB TOSHIBA
SD6A/64GB 64 GB Kingston
RP-SDW32G 32 GB Panasonic
SD-E032GUX 32 GB TOSHIBA
RP-SDM16GK1K 16 GB Panasonic
RP-SDM08GK1K 8 GB Panasonic
RP-SDV08GK1K 8 GB Panasonic
SDSDRH-8192-903 8 GB SANDISK
RP-SDV04GK1K 4 GB Panasonic
RP-SDM04GK1K 4 GB Panasonic
SDSDBR-4096-J85 4 GB SANDISK
SDSDRH-4096-903 4 GB SANDISK
SDSDRX-4096-903 4 GB SANDISK
AD-SDH2G 2 GB ADTEC
HPC-SD2GM2 2 GB HAGIWARA SYS-COM
HPC-SD2GT 2 GB HAGIWARA SYS-COM
QSDS-2G 2 GB PQI
RP-SDK02GJ1A 2 GB Panasonic
RP-SDR02GJ1A 2 GB Panasonic
RSDC-G2G 2 GB BUFFALO
RSDC-S2G 2 GB BUFFALO
SD/2GBFE 2 GB Kingston
SD-2G 2 GB I/O DATA
SDP-2G 2 GB I/O DATA
SD-B002GT4 2 GB TOSHIBA
SDSDB-2048-J60 2 GB SANDISK
SDSDH-2048-903 2 GB SANDISK
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-9
1.6 Chart Plotter Introduction
The chart plotter provides a small world map in raster format. A vector chart for the US
coastline (with Alaska and Hawaii) is provided also. The plotter section has functions
to enter points, and create and plan routes.
The chart plotter receives position information supplied from the position-fixing equip-
ment like GPS or DGPS. Your position is marked on the screen with the boat icon. You
can change the shape of the boat icon to match that of your ship.
The points and routes you have entered are shown on the screen. You can move, de-
lete and edit the points and routes from a pop-up menu.
The chart plotter also
Plots the track of your ship
Measures distances and bearings
Marks man overboard (MOB) position
• Controls alarm functions
• Follows routes
The undo and redo icons are available for point and route operations.
Undo: Reverse the last action.
Redo: Repeat the last action.
Undo
icon
Redo
icon
Data
area
Chart
scale
North
indicator
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
RADA
AD
D
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
R
RADA
AD
D
D
AD
AD
AD
D
D
AD
D
R
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
ATA
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
A
A
1
DATA
ATAATA
ATA
ATA
TA
A
A
AT
A
1
Heading line
COG
Route
Point
Your ship’s track
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-10
1.7 Radar Introduction
A radar system operates in the microwave part of the radio frequency (RF) range. The
radar detects the position and movement of objects. Objects are shown on the radar
display at their measured distances and bearings in intensities according to echo
strength.
The radar display is available in head-up and north-up modes and orientation in true
and relative motion. The relative motion display shows other ships movement relative
to your ship. The true motion display shows your ship and other objects in motion ac-
cording to their true courses and speeds.
A guard zone tells you when the radar targets are in the area you indicate. The trail of
targets can be shown in afterglow to monitor their movements.
The dual range display scans and displays two different radar ranges at the same
time. This display lets you watch on both short and long ranges at the same time.
Data
area
Range Range ring interval
Range rings
RADA
RAD
RAD
RAD
RAD
A
D
RAD
D
RAD
D
RAD
AD
RA
RAD
RA
A
A
A
A
R
R
R
R
RADA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
A
DA
A
A
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
D
D
D
AD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA
1
DATA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ㅍା
DRS_RADOME
10:30 AM
ᗵᐲ
ᶏ㕙෻኿
㔎㔐෻኿
Gain
Sea
Rain
Heading line
Heading line
Your ship’s position
Your ship’s position
N
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
200
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
210
180
170
160
140
220
190
150
130
Guard zone
Guard zone
North mark
North mark
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-11
1.8 Sounder (Fish Finder) Introduction
The sounder (fish finder) display provides a picture of the echoes found by the fish
finder. Echoes are scrolled across the screen from the right position to the left position.
The echoes at the right position are the current echoes. These echoes can be from
separate fish, a school of fish, or the bottom. Depth to the bottom is indicated always,
provided the gain is set correctly. You can scroll the echoes backward.
Both low and high TX frequencies are provided. (Frequencies depend on the trans-
ducer connected.) The low frequency has a wide detection area, which is for general
detection and understanding bottom conditions. The high frequency has a narrow
beam that helps you inspect fish.
The range, gain, clutter and TVG can be adjusted automatically according to your pur-
pose (cruising or fishing) to let you do other tasks.
Bottom
echo
Depth
A-scope
display
Depth scale
Frequency
mode
Depth
scale
Fish
symbol
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
DATA
2
RADAR
RADAR
556 ft
780 ft
LF
750-
RADAR
RA
RA
A
RADAR
RA
RA
A
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-12
1.9 RotoKey Menus
The main function of the RotoKey
TM
is to display the
RotoKey menu, which is a set of menu items that
change with the operating mode. For TZT9/TZT14, push
the RotoKey
TM
to display the RotoKey menu then ro-
tate the RotoKey
TM
to select a menu item. You can also
select a menu item by dragging with a finger. When you
search through the menu item, the now-selected menu
item is the longest and surrounded in yellow. For TZT-
BB, tap the screen to display the RotoKey menu. If the
menu you are looking for is not shown, select [More...]
(then drag the menu items) to select a menu item. Push
the RotoKey
TM
or tap the menu item to do the function
shown on the selected menu item. For details, see
section 13.1.
The indication at the end of a menu item indicates menu item category:
• The "W" mark indicates a multi-function menu item. Push the RotoKey
TM
(or tap the
menu item desired) to go to the next level.
• The "9" mark indicates ON status (selected) of the item shown on the menu item.
The "9" mark disappears with OFF status (deselected). Push the RotoKey
TM
(or
tap the menu item desired) to switch ON or OFF.
This manual states these operation procedures as follows:
ON status with the "9" mark: Select [menu item name].
OFF status: Deselect [menu item name].
There is no mark on a menu item that does the function labeled on the control, for
example, [Hdg Ln Off] in the radar display. Push the RotoKey
TM
(or tap the menu
item desired) to process the item.
RotoKey
TM
(for TZT9/
TZT14)
Selected
menu item
(longest and
indicated with
a yellow
highlight)
Additional functions
Function ON
Function OFF
Hdg Ln Off
Echo Trail
Rings
Radar Filters
Orientation
Radar Filters
Rings
Orientation
Hdg Ln Off
Echo Trail
For TZTBB For TZT9/TZT14
Tx Radar
Radar Adjust
Rings
More...
Select [More...]
to display
hidden menus.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-13
1.10 Pop-up Menus
The pop-up menus let you quickly access the com-
mands according to the selected object, position or ac-
tive display. Select an object or position to display the
pop-up menu. The pop-up menus shown on the screen
depend on the RotoKey mode (see section 13.1). The
right figure shows the Chart Plotter pop-up menu for
TZT9/TZT14.
How to operate a pop-up menu
Rotate the RotoKey
TM
(or drag the menu items with a finger) to select an item. The
operation is same as the RotoKey menu.
• The "W" mark indicates a multi-function menu item. Push the RotoKey
TM
(or tap the
menu item desired) to go to the next level.
• The "9" mark indicates ON status (selected) of the item shown on the menu item.
The "9" mark disappears with OFF status (deselected). Push the RotoKey
TM
(or
tap the menu item desired) to switch ON or OFF.
There is no mark on a menu item that does the function labeled on the control or
displays the window for the function, for example, software keyboard. Push the
RotoKey
TM
(or tap the menu item desired) to process the item.
1.11 Data Area (Data Box)
The data area at both sides of the screen shows the navigation data, with data boxes.
You can select the data to display in the area, and show or hide the data boxes as
necessary. The data that you can show depends on your system configuration.
Note: A data box set is displayed at the left side in a three-way split screen.
Go To
New Point
New Route
Lat/Lon
Orientation
Track Re
Side menu
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
DATA
2
RADAR
RADAR
April 10
P12.3
AWA
°
N 25°46.598'
W 80°09.795'
DATA 2DATA 1 RADAR
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
DATA
2
RADAR
RADAR
Side menu
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-14
Select [DATA 1], [DATA 2] or [RADAR] of the side menu at the left or right of the
screen to show a data box set. To hide a data box set, select [×] at the top right-hand
corner of the data area.
You can select the data to display in each data box on the screen.
1.11.1 How to set the data boxes
How to change the contents of a data box
1. Select the data box to change. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Select Data].
3. Select the new data.
How to add a data box to a data area
1. Tap any unoccupied area in the data area to display the pop-up menu.
Select the data box to
change (in this case, COG).
The pop-up menu appears.
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
RADAR
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
RADAR
D
D
D
AD
AD
AD
D
D
A
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
AT
ATAAT
AT
AT
AT
A
A
1
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
TA
ATA
A
A
1
Select Data
Graphic
Remove
Cycle Data
Tap unoccupied
position.
The pop-up menu appears.
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
RADAR
AD
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
D
RADAR
AD
D
D
AD
AD
D
AD
D
D
D
A
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
DATA
D
DD
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
ATA
ATA
AT
AT
T
AT
AT
A
A
1
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA ATA
TA
ATA
ATA
ATA
A
1
Go To Informations
Tides & Currents
Radar Gain/Sea/
EBL/VRM
Waypoint
Date
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-15
2. Select the data to add. The added data appears under the bottommost data box.
[Date] is added in the following example.
You can sort the data boxes by drag and drop.
How to delete a data box from a data area
Pop-up menu: Select the data box to delete. The pop-up menu appears. Select [Re-
move].
Touch control: Drag the data box outside the data area.
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
RADAR
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
RADAR
D
AD
D
AD
AD
D
AD
D
D
D
D
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
AT
ATA
AT
AT
AT
AT
A
A
1
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
TA
TA
ATA
ATA
A
A
1
10/10/2012
10:30:15 AM
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
RADAR
D
AD
AD
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
RADAR
AD
D
AD
AD
D
AD
D
D
D
D
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
AT
AT
AT
A
A
A
1
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA ATA
TA
TA
ATA
ATA
A
A
1
Drag the data box
outside the data area.
Drag the data box
outside the data area.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-16
How to switch the indication between analog (graphic) and digital
Select the data box for which to switch the indication. The pop-up menu appears. Se-
lect [Graphic] to display the analog indication. Deselect [Graphic] to display the digital
indication.
1.11.2 Data cycling
A data box may contain more than one data indication. In this case you can cycle the
data, at the interval desired.
How to add a data indication to a data box and cycle the data
Do the following to add data indication(s) to a data box and cycle the data.
1. Select the data box for which you want to add a data indication. The pop-up menu
appears.
Note: You can not cycle the analog data.
2. Select [Cycle Data].
3. Select the data to add.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to continue adding data.
How to set the cycling time
You can set the cycling time interval as follows:
1. Select [General] - [NavData Multi Data Dwell Time] of the main menu.
2. Select [2s], [3s], [5s] or [10s].
3. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
: Analog
: Digital
Graphic
Graphic
10:30 AM
COG
°M
291.7
ᷓᐲ
m
C
ᶏ㕙᷷ᐲ
10:30 AM
291.7
COG
°M
7.0
SOG
kn
38.5
DPT(S)
ft
2.88
SST
°F
0’02s
0’03s
0’05s
0’10s
NavData Multi Data Dwell Time
0’03s
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-17
1.11.3 How to adjust transparency of the data box
You can adjust the degree of transparency for the data box with the [NavData Trans-
parency] slider with [General] of the main menu. The available degree of transparency
is 0 - 80(%). (Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects.)
1.12 Menu Introduction
The menu system has main menus and related sub menus. The number of menus de-
pends on equipment connected.
How to use the menu
1. Press the Home key (or tap the Home icon) to display the menu icon bar.
2. Select (tap) the icon desired on the menu icon bar. The function for each icon is
in the following table.
Menu icons
For example, select (tap) the [Menu] icon to open the main menu.
Menu icon Function Menu icon Function
15 main menus; set the
screens for chart plotter, ra-
dar, fish finder, and so on.
Mark the MOB position.
The lists for points, routes,
detailed routes, AIS, DSC
and ARPA
Open the list for the in-
stalled chart data.
Enter the unlock codes.
Open the tide graph. Open the fusion screen.
Menu icon bar
This icon appears
only when fusion
equipment is
connected.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-18
3. Drag the main menus on the right side of the screen to display a menu desired.
The selected menu is indicated with a yellow highlight. The sub menus for the se-
lected menu appear. Below is an example screen for the [Radar] menu.
4. Do one of the following according to the menu type:
[ON] or [OFF] icon: Select (tap) the [ON] or [OFF] icon as appropriate.
Slider bar: Drag the circle icon to set the level. Current level is indicated on the
icon.
Main menus
Sub menus
Menu currently selected Preview screen shows you the result
of certain selections.
Select [Close]
to exit menu.
Scroll mark (Indicates menus currently not shown on the screen.
You can see the menus currently not shown by dragging.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
12
0
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
2
40
0
0
3
00
310
320
330
340
350
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-19
Numerical value with the software keyboard icon ( ): Select (tap) the menu
to open the software keyboard. Set the value then select [Confirm].
Color icon: Select (tap) the menu to open the options. Select (tap) the option
desired. Current selection has a checkmark.
Options: Select (tap) the menu to open the options. Select (tap) the option de-
sired. Current selection has a checkmark.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Confirm Cancel
Trail Color
0’15s
0’30s
1’00s
3’00s
6’00s
Trail Length
0’15s
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-20
1.13 [Display] Menu on the RotoKey Menu (TZT9/
TZT14 only)
[Display] on the RotoKey menu is common for all displays.
[NavData]: Open the data boxes (see section 1.11).
[Menu]: Open the main menu (see section 1.12).
[Lists]: Open the lists menu (see section 1.12 and section 4.7).
[Tide]: Open the tide graph (see section 1.12 and paragraph 3.2.4).
1.14 Function Gesture on the Main Menu
You can easily access a function by tapping the screen with two fingers. Select the
function as below.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [Function Gesture] menu.
3. Select the function among the following:
[None]: Nothing happens.
[Screen Capture]: Capture a screenshot. The following window appears. Select
[SD-Left] or [SD-Right] where to save the screenshot.
Menu
Lists
NavData
Tide
Display
None
Screen Capture
Event
MOB
Home
Function Gesture
Event
SD-Left
Cancel
Screen Capture
SD-Right
If either left or right SD card is not
inserted, its option is grayed out.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-21
[Event]: Record an event to the logbook. The selected mark is put at the position
at the time the screen was tapped to open the [Creating Event] window (see
paragraph 4.2.2)
[MOB]: Record MOB position to the logbook (see section 1.17).
[Home]: Open the display selection window (see section 1.4) and display the
menu icon bar (see section 1.12).
[Menu]: Open the main menu (see section 1.12).
[Lists]: Open the lists menu (see section 1.12 and section 4.7).
[Tide]: Open the tide graph (see section 1.12 and paragraph 3.2.4).
[Fusion]: Open the full FUSION screen (see section 9.7).
[Fusion Ctrl]: Open the control bar for FUSION menu (see section 9.7).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
1.15 Language
The default interface language is English (United States). You can select a language
to use as follows:
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [Language] menu.
3. Select the desired language to use. The confirmation message appears.
4. Select [Yes] then this equipment restarts.
Cancel
Creating Event
English (United States)
English (United Kingdom)
Spanish (Spain)
French (France)
German (Germany)
Language
English (United States)
Application have to restart now!
Do you want to restart application ?
Yes
No
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-22
1.16 Boat Icon
The boat icon marks current position. In the 3D display, you can change the shape of
the boat icon to match your ship. In the 2D display, the boat icon can not be changed
and is red.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Initial Setup] - [Boat Icon] menu.
3. Select [Sport Fishing], [Cruiser], [SailBoat] or [Commercial] to match your ship.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
1.17 Man Overboard (MOB)
Use the MOB function if a person or object falls overboard. You need either position
data from a navigation device, or heading and speed data to calculate position by
dead reckoning. You can activate the MOB from the chart plotter and radar displays
and MOB position is marked on both the chart plotter and radar displays.
How to mark the MOB position
There are two methods by which you can enter the MOB mark: two fingers tap on the
screen, or the [MOB] icon on the menu icon bar.
Method 1: Tap two fingers on the screen
Preset the Function Gesture for MOB mark. Once you have done this preset, simply
tap the screen with two fingers to enter the MOB mark.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
Sport Fishing
Cruiser
SailBoat
Commercial
Boat Icon
Sport Fishing
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-23
2. Select the [General] - [Function Gesture] menu.
3. Select [MOB].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5. Tap the screen with two fingers on the chart plotter display or the radar display.
The area around the boat icon is zoomed in. (The scale is automatically set to 1.25
nm for the chart plotter and 0.5 nm for the radar.) The MOB mark is entered and
flashes. A yellow line runs between the MOB position and your ship. This line is
the course to take to go to the MOB position.
The MOB marks entered are automatically saved to the points lists.
Method 2: [MOB] icon on the menu icon bar
Select the [MOB] icon on the menu icon bar. The chart plotter display opens and the
MOB mark position is zoomed in.
MOB information
Select a MOB mark to display the name, comment and depth (chart plotter only).
None
Screen Capture
Event
MOB
Home
Function Gesture
Event
MOB mark on the chart plotter display
MOB mark on the radar display
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-24
How to go to a MOB mark
Select a MOB mark to go to then select [Go To] from the pop-up menu.
How to delete a MOB mark
Inactive MOB mark: Select a MOB mark to display the pop-up menu. Select [Delete].
Active MOB mark: Before you erase an active MOB mark, you must cancel the nav-
igation. Select the active MOB mark to display the pop-up menu then select [Stop
Nav.]. Select the MOB mark to display the pop-up menu then select [Delete].
XTE lines
Green: Starboard
Red: Port
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-25
1.18 Facsimile Receiver FAX-30
The FURUNO Facsimile Receiver FAX-30 installs in the TZT network and can be con-
trolled from a TZT display. Below are the steps to start fax operation.
1. At the installation of this equipment, connect the FAX-30 to the TZT.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select the [Initial Setup] - [FAX30 Browser] menu.
4. Select [WX FAX] or [NAVTEX].
5. Refer to the Operator’s Manual of the FAX-30 for operation information.
The FAX-30 display can be accessed only by one TZT display. When another TZT dis-
play accesses the FAX-30, control of the FAX-30 is given to that display after the pic-
ture is stopped completely. This sequence takes approximately one minute.
Browser
FAX30 Browser
FA30 Browser
FA50 Browser
Browser
Browser
Browser Installation
Close
FAXSIMILE RECEIVER
FAX-30
WX FAX
NAVTEX
LOGOUT
Close
MENU
100N JMH
3622.5kHz
XXXrpm
SN=11
SS=55
IOCXXX
STBY
CHANNEL SETUP
TIMER SETUP
EDIT STATION LIST
SYSTEM SETUP
RX MODE
<< Top
NEXT PAGE 1
/
2
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-26
1.19 AIS Transponder FA-30, FA-50
The FURUNO AIS Transponder FA-30 (or FA-50) installs in the TZT network and can
be controlled from a TZT display. To access the main menu of the transponder, do the
following:
1. At the installation of this equipment, connect the FA-30 (or FA-50) to the TZT.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select the [Initial Setup] - [FA30 Browser] or [FA50 Browser] menu.
4. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for FA-30 or FA-50 for operation information.
Browser
FAX30 Browser
FA30 Browser
FA50 Browser
Browser
Browser
Browser Installation
Close
Initial Setup
Own Vessel Data
Message
Alarm Status
Sensor Status
Tests
For Service
FA-50
Close
Port Setup
Own Vessel Data
Sensor Status
Test
For Service
FA-30
or
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-27
1.20 DSC Message Information
The DSC (Digital Selective Calling) message information feature provides, on the
chart plotter and radar displays, the MMSI no. and position* of the ships that have
transmitted a DSC message to you. A hexagon-shaped marker marks a ship’s posi-
tion. The marker is color-coded according to the type of DSC message sent, red for
distress and green for non-distress.
* Position at the time of message transmission. Position information is not updated.
This feature requires connection of a DSC capable radiotelephone that outputs the
DSC sentence in NMEA 0183 format.
1.20.1 DSC notification
When a DSC message for position of the ship is received, the message "DSC Position
Report Received" appears in yellow on the status bar at the top of the screen (refer to
paragraph 2.10.7).
When a DSC message for distress is received, the message "DSC Distress Call Re-
ceived" appears in red on the status bar at the top of the screen. To delete the distress
message, tap the status bar.
1.20.2 How to show or hide the DSC message information
On the chart plotter or radar display, select [Targets] from the RotoKey menu then se-
lect [AIS/DSC]. The DSC information appears. To hide the DSC information, deselect
[AIS/DSC].
Note: On the chart plotter display, the [AIS/DSC] menu with the RotoKey
TM
is avail-
able in the [Full] mode (see section 13.1).
When you receive a DSC message, the appropriate DSC marker and the MMSI no. of
the transmitting ship appear on the chart plotter and radar displays.
1.20.3 How to go to a DSC point
Select the DSC marker to go to. The pop-up menu appears. Select [Go To].
1.20.4 How to display the DSC information
Select a DSC marker to display the simple information (position, MMSI no. of the ship
that transmitted a DSC message and so on). To get the detailed information, select a
DSC marker to display the pop-up menu then select [Info].
Red: DSC marker for
distress message
Green: DSC marker for
non-distress message
333336789 333335678
MMSI no.
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-28
1.20.5 The DSC list
When you receive a DSC message, it is automatically registered to the DSC list. To
help you identify a ship quickly on the chart plotter and radar displays, you can replace
the MMSI no. indication with the name of your choice; for example, ship’s name.
How to open the DSC list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [DSC List].
3. Select [Name], [Range] or [Cpa] in the [Sort by] area at the top of the list.
[Name]: DSC sorted in alphanumeric order
[Range]: DSC sorted by range in ascending order
[Cpa]: DSC sorted by CPA in ascending order
To see the detailed information for a DSC, select a DSC then select [Detail].
To center a DSC marker on the screen, select the DSC then select [Find On Chart].
To edit DSC nickname, select the DSC then select [Edit Nickname] (refer to "How to
edit an AIS nickname" on page 12-6).
Target Info
Nickname
ABCDEF
MMSI
333336789
COG 263.4°M
SOG 1.5 kn
Range
2.101 NM
Bearing 210.4°
Time
9’34s
Position
N 47°47.692’; W122°29.653’
Nature of Distress
Distress
Detailed information
Name
Range Cpa
Sort by:
Name/Mmsi
AAAAA
333331111
Range/Bearing
19.71 NM
25.6 °M
Cpa/Tcpa
16.16 NM
-1h40’
Name/Mmsi
BBBBB
333332222
Range/Bearing
20.42 NM
20.5 °M
Cpa/Tcpa
19.42 NM
-27’20s
Detail
Find On Chart
Edit Nickname
AAAAA
333331111
Name/Mmsi
Range/Bearing
Cpa/Tcpa
19.71 NM
25.6
°
M
16.16 NM
-1h40’
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-29
1.21 Wireless LAN Settings
You can connect to the internet with the wireless LAN signal to download weather in-
formation (see chapter 11) and to connect to an iPhone, iPod or iPad. To download
weather infromation, connect the existing LAN network. To connect to an iPhone, iPod
or iPad, create a local wireless network.
Notes about the wireless LAN
The wireless LAN function is available only in the countries which have acquired ra-
dio wave certification. Turn this function off in countries which do not have radio
wave certification. Ocean-going vessels that have radio wave certification can use
the wireless LAN function in any country that has acquired radio wave certification.
Vessels with radio wave certification that enter a country that does not have radio
wave certification may use the wireless LAN function only onboard the vessel.
Available contries (as of January, 2012): USA, Canada, EU, New Zealand, Austra-
lia, Japan
The communication rate and effective range for the wireless LAN can be affected
by the electromagnetic wave, interfering object, or access point location.
We strongly recommend using the wireless LAN with encrypted connection. Other-
wise unauthorized access by a third party can occur, which can cause loss of data
or system crash.
We recommend changing the initial password when using a local wireless network.
How to connect the existing LAN network
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [Connect to the Internet] menu.
3. Select [When Necessary].
4. Select [Wireless LAN Settings].
Never
At Startup
When Necessary
Connect to the Internet
When Necessary
Wireless LAN Settings
Wireless LAN Settings
Wireless
Wireless Mode
Connect to existing LAN
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-30
5. Select the [ON] icon in [Wireless].
Note: You can use the wireless LAN function when the internal temperature of the
equipment inside is detected with the temperature sensor and is over 0°C. The
[ON] icon in [Wireless] is grayed out if the equipment does not meet the above re-
quirement.
6. Select [Wireless Mode].
7. Select [Connect to existing LAN]. The available wireless networks are listed.
8. Select [Connect] in the desired network.
9. Select the password field to open the software keyboard.
10. Enter the password then select [Ok]. The IP address is displayed.
How to create a local wireless network
When you connect wireless LAN network without access to the existing LAN network,
do the following to create a new local network.
Note 1: Do the following steps 1 to 7 with [OFF] in [Network Status].
Note 2: Connection to a local network may not be possible if the network is unstable.
In this case, select the [OFF] icon in [Wireless] then select the [ON] icon. Connect via
existing LAN network.
Note 3: Confirm if [When Necessary] is selected in [Connect to the Internet] menu.
Connect to existing LAN
Create local network
Wireless Mode
Connect to existing LAN
WPA2PSK
WEP
Connect
XXXX
XXXXX
XXXXXX
WEP
Connect
Connect
Available Wireless LAN Networks
Ok
Close
Password
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Forget all Wireless LAN networks saved
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-31
1. Select [Create local network] in [Wireless Mode].
2. Select [SSID] to open the software keyboard.
3. Enter the SSID then select [Confirm].
4. Select [Authentification].
5. Select the security from [Open], [WEP] or [WPA2 - PSK]. For [Open], go to step
8. For others, go to the next step.
Note: Select the security according to the equipment connected to the network.
Select [WEP] to connect an iPhone or iPad to the network. ([WPA2-PSK] is not
available for iOS.)
6. Select [Password] to open the software keyboard.
7. Enter the password then select [Confirm].
Note: If you entered the invalid password, the following error message appears.
NAVNETTZT
Wireless LAN Settings
Wireless
Wireless Mode Create local network
Create local Wireless network
Open
WEP
WPA2 - PSK
Authentification
Open
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-32
Select [Ok] then reenter the correct password.
8. Select the [ON] icon in [Network Status] to connect the created network.
How to forget all wireless LAN networks
1. With [Connect to existing LAN] selected in [Wireless Mode], select [Forget all
Wireless LAN networks saved]. The confirmation message appears.
2. Select [Yes].
Invalid password :
Password must be at least 8 characters and cannot exceed 63 characters.
Ok
Invalid password :
Only 5 or 13 characters allowed.
Ok
For [WPA2 - PSK]
For [WEP]
Delete all saved Wireless LAN networks ?
Yes
No
Forget all Wireless LAN networks saved
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-33
1.22 Software Update
You can update the software via the internet. See section 1.21 about the internet con-
nection.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [General].
3. Select the [Update] icon in [Check for Software Update]. The following messages
appear in order.
4. Select [Yes] then this equipment restarts.
1.23 Operation by Remote Control
You can turn on or off the operation by a remote control via wireless LAN (iPhone, iPod
or iPad).
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [Allow Remote Control] menu.
[Off]: Cannot operate this equipment by a remote control.
[View Only]: Cannot operate this equipment but can display the data on the screen
of the remote control.
[Full Control]: Can fully operate this equipment by a remote control.
3. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Checking new version availability...
New software update has been downloaded:
QuickBuild_20121031.4.zip
Do you want to install it ?
(The device will be rebooted during installation process)
Yes
No
Off
View Only
Full Control
Allow Remote Control
Full Control
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION
1-34
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-1
2. CHART PLOTTER
This chapter shows you how to do the following:
Use and prepare the chart plotter
Set chart plotter related alarms
Control the track
2.1 Chart Type
A world map in raster chart format is included in your unit. A vector chart for the US
coastline (Alaska and Hawaii included) is provided also. To use this chart plotter as a
navigational aid, have electronic charts (stored in the internal memory) for the area
you navigate. Contact your dealer about charts for your area.
There are five types of chart format in this equipment: [Raster], [S-57], [Jeppesen],
[Navionics] or [Fishing].
[Raster]: Raster charts are digitized scans of NOAA paper charts. Raster charts have
information like notes, source diagrams, tidal diamonds, horizontal and vertical datum,
etc.
[S-57]: S-57 formats are vector charts (digital files) that contain marine features and
information created for marine navigation. These charts are made according to the In-
ternational Hydrographic Organization (IHO).
[Jeppesen]: Vector chart (data by Jeppesen)
[Navionics]: Vector chart (data by Navionics)
[Fishing]: Fishing charts are vector charts that show only detailed depth contours.
These are available for US waters.
How to select a chart type
1. Select the plotter display on the display selection window (see section 1.4).
2. Select [Chart] from the RotoKey menu.
3. Select the chart type from [Raster], [S-57], [Jeppesen], [Navionics], [Fishing] or
[Auto]*.
*: [Auto] automatically switches the chart type according to availability and chart prior-
ity setting (priority setting: [Plotter Display] - [Chart Priority in Auto Mode] - [Vector] or
[Raster]).
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-2
2.2 Chart Scale
You can change the chart scale to change the amount of information shown, or zoom
in or out at the location you select. The selected chart scale appears in the chart scale
box at the bottom right-hand corner of the screen. The value shown is the distance
from the left of the screen to the right of the screen.
How to zoom in or out the chart scale
TZT9/TZT14: Rotate the RotoKey
TM
or pinch the chart screen.
TZTBB: Pinch the chart screen. Or tap the chart scale box at the bottom right-hand
corner of the screen to display the slider bar. Drag the circle icon to set the chart scale.
Note: You can zoom in or out the chart scale on the preview screen.
2.3 Orientation Mode
The chart can be shown in head-up or north-up orientation.
1. Select [Orientation] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [North Up] or [Head Up].
[North Up]: North is at the top of the screen. When your heading changes, the boat
icon moves according to heading. This mode is for long-range navigation.
[Head Up]: Displays the chart with the current compass heading of your ship at
the top of the screen. The heading data from a compass is required. When the
heading changes, the boat icon remains fixed, and the chart picture rotates ac-
cording to heading.
Chart scale
Chart scale box
North indicator
Zoom in
Zoom out
Tap the area circled above to display the
slider bar.
Note: The orientation mode can be changed
by tapping the north indicator (see section
2.3).
Drag the circle
icon to set the
chart scale.
Slider bar
Zoom in
Zoom out
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-3
Note: You can change the orientation mode by tapping the chart scale box at the bot-
tom right-hand corner of the screen. Each time you tap the chart scale box, the orien-
tation mode switches between north up and head up. The north indicator rotates
accordingly.
2.4 How to Move the Chart
Move the chart in the following conditions.
Your ship is not in the current area
Take a look at another area
Enter a point at another location
Do the following to move the chart:
Change the chart scale with zoom in or zoom out (section 2.2).
Select [Center Vessel] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to return your ship
to the center of the screen.
Switch to the 3D display by dragging two fingers upward or downward.
2.5 The Boat Icon
The boat icon appears at the current position. You can change the icon shape in the
3D display from the menu (see section 1.16). The boat icon has the functions indicat-
ed below also.
• The Heading line is a straight line that runs from your position and this line shows
the current heading.
• The COG vector is a vector line that runs from the boat icon. This vector points in
the direction in which your ship is now moving. Also, a red arrow appears as the
turn direction.
• The Track plots the movement of your ship.
North indicator
Track
COG vector
Heading line
Turn direction
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-4
Heading line
To display the heading line, do as follows:
1. Select the boat icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Heading Line].
COG vector
To display the COG vector and the turn direction, do as follows:
1. Select the boat icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [COG Vector].
Track
To display the track, do as follows:
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Tracks].
COG/SOG predictor
The COG/SOG predictor shows estimated course and speed of your ship. This pre-
dictor is displayed as the COG vector. The top of the predictor is the estimated position
of your ship at the end of the selected predictor time or distance (set on the menu).
You can increase the length of the predictor to find the estimated position of your ship
in the future on the current course and speed. You can set the COG/SOG predictor as
follows. The greater the distance or the time, the longer the COG/SOG predictor.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Ship & Track] - [Own Ship COG/SOG Predictor] menu.
3. Select [Distance] or [Time]. For [Distance], go to the next step. For [Time], go to
step 6.
4. Select [COG/SOG Predictor Length] to display the software keyboard.
5. Set the length for COG/SOG predictor then select [Confirm]. Go to step 7.
Own Ship COG/SOG Predictor
Time
Distance
Time
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-5
6. Select [COG/SOG Predictor Time] then select the time for COG/SOG predictor.
7. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Orientation
You can select the orientation of the boat icon.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Ship & Track] - [Vessel Icon Orientation] menu.
3. Select [Heading] or [COG].
2.6 How to Find the Range and Bearing to a Location
Between any two locations
The [Measure] menu measures the range and bearing between any two locations on
your chart. Range and bearing between the two locations are digitally indicated on the
screen. This pop-up menu is available in [Full] RotoKey mode (refer to section 13.1).
1. Select the starting location then the pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Measure].
00:00:10
00:00:30
00:01:00
00:02:00
00:05:00
COG/SOG Predictor Time
00:02:00
Vessel Icon Orientation
Heading
Heading
COG
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-6
3. Select the 2nd location. A dashed line runs between the start location and the 2nd
location. The range and bearing to the 2nd location are shown.
4. Select [Cancel Ruler] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the indi-
cation.
From your ship to a location
1. Select the location then the pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Dist. to Boat]. A dashed line runs between the boat icon and the selected
location. The range, bearing and the time to go to the selected location are shown.
3. Select [Cancel Ruler] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the indi-
cation.
2.7 Chart Object Information
Vector charts show many objects, like buoys and lighthouses, for which you can find
the information. Port, tide and current information are available if the chart contains
this information.
Select any chart object to find the information.
Range and bearing from starting
location to the 2nd location
M: Magnetic
8.765NM
76.4°M
8.765NM
76.4°M
Starting location
2nd location
Range, bearing and
time to go to point
M: Magnetic
11.38NM
56.6°M
1h23’
11.38NM
56.6°M
1h23’
Your ship
By, special purpose
Shape pillar
Category
TSS mark (Traffic
Separation Scheme)
Color yellow
Name
Puget Sound Traffic Lane
Separation Lighted Buoy T
S57 Object Info
Source date 10/10/2012
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-7
2.8 Multiple Chart Plotter Displays
A maximum of three chart plotter displays can be shown on one screen. The multiple
chart plotter displays let you see the conditions around your ship on both short and
long ranges. Also, you can see how your ship moves toward your destination from
more than one angle. For example, you can show one display in 2D and another in 3D.
The following features can be adjusted individually.
• AIS • ARPA • Chart scale
• Chart orientation • Chart type • Scroll the chart
Overlays (radar, sat photo, depth shading, tide icon, tidal current, ACCU-FISH
TM
(see
section 7.10), points, routes, tracks)
2D and 3D (For the 3D displays, the aerial view (pitch and orientation) are adjusted
together, but different orientation modes (north up and head up) are possible.)
Chart plotter display 1
Chart type: Raster Chart scale: 1,969 NM
Orientation: Head-up Perspective: 3D
Chart plotter display 3
Chart type: S-57 Chart scale: 36.15 NM
Orientation: Head-up Perspective: 2D
Chart plotter display 2
Chart type: Raster Chart scale: 1,717 NM
Orientation: North-up Perspective: 2D
Overlay: Sat photo
1,969 NM
36.15 NM
South
Pembroke Pines
rt Lauderdale
rk
H
Carol City
1,717 NM
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-8
2.9 Cartographic Text and Objects on Vector Charts
This section shows you how to show or hide the cartographic objects and text infor-
mation that appear on the vector charts.
2.9.1 Control visibility of text and object information
The [Vector Chart] menu controls the visibility of text and object information, for exam-
ple, buoy names and light description.
[Chart Object Size]: Drag the circle icon to set the chart object size (setting value: 50
to 200%).
[Chart Color Palette]: Set the chart color pattern. [Standard] is the NAVNet TZtouch
original color palette, [S-52] complies with the official S-52 charts, and [Sunlight] pro-
vides a high contrast palette.
[Chart Symbols]: Select the chart symbol type. [S-52] are the official IMO symbols (al-
so referred to as simplified symbols) library for ECDIS. [International] symbols are the
copy of paper chart symbols of IALA symbols library (US symbols library).
[Shallow Contour]: Set the shallow depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0,
18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0 ft). Show shallow depth contours in dark blue.
[Safety Contour]: Set the safety depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0,
18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, 100, 200 ft). Show safety depth contours in
medium blue.
[Deep Contour]: Set the deep depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0, 18.0,
21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, 100, 200, 300, 500, 1,000, 2,000 ft). Show deep-
depth contours in light blue. Depths greater than set here are shown in white.
[Text (Important)]: Show or hide the important text information.
6.0 ft
15.0 ft
30.0 ft
6.0 ft
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-9
[Text (Other)]: Show or hide the other text information.
[Display Buoy Names]: Show or hide the buoy names.
[Display Light Description]: Show or hide the light descriptions.
[Display Light Sectors]: Show or hide light sectors for fixed beacons.
[Display Routes]: Show or hide routes.
[Display Routes Bearings]: Show or hide route bearings.
[Display Soundings]: Show or hide depth soundings.
[Display Soundings in Red]: Spot soundings whose depths are lower than the value
selected on the [Shallower than...] menu are shown in red.
[Shallower than ...]: Select the value for the [Display Soundings in Red] menu (setting
range: 0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, 100 ft).
[Display Obstructions Depth Below Safety]: Show or hide obstruction depths under the
safety depths.
[Display Seabed]: Show or hide seabed composition indication, for example, mud,
sand, rock.
[Cautionary Areas]: Show or hide the cautionary areas that appear on the chart.
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the [Vec-
tor Chart] menu.
2.9.2 Control visibility of cartographic objects
The [S-52 Display] menu controls the visibility of cartographic objects, for example,
lights, fog signals, etc.
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-10
[S-52 Vector Chart Display Mode]: Set the level of information to show on the chart.
The selections are [Custom], [Base], [Standard], [Other], and [Fishing]. The chart fea-
tures are turned on or off according to setting.
Note: The following menu items except [Reset Default Settings] are unavailable when
you select the mode other than [Custom].
[Unknown Object]: Show or hide unknown objects that appear on the chart.
[Chart Data Coverage]: Show or hide the geographic names and geographic objects.
[Water and Seabed Features]: Show or hide the water and seabed presentation.
[Traffic Routes]: Show or hide the marine traffic routes.
[Information Areas]: Show or hide the information areas that appear on the chart.
[Buoys & Beacons]: Show or hide the buoys and beacons.
[Lights]: Show or hide the sector of light that a fixed beacon shines.
[Fog Signals]: Show or hide the structure that sends a fog signal.
[Radar]: Show or hide the radar buoy.
[Information About Chart Data]: Show or hide the chart data information.
[Obstructions]: Show or hide obstructions (wrecks, etc.)
[Depth Contours, Currents, Magnetics]: Show or hide the depth contours, tidal cur-
rents and magnetics.
[Fishing Facilities]: Show or hide the location of fishing facilities.
[Services (Pilot, Signal Stations)]: Show or hide the location of pilots and signal sta-
tions.
[Harbour Facilities]: Show or hide the location of harbour facilities.
[Services and Small Craft Facilities]: Show or hide the services for ship and small craft.
[Land Features]: Show or hide the cartographic features that are shown on land.
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the [S-52
Display] menu.
2.10 Alarms
The various plotter alarms alert you (with audiovisual alarms) when the conditions
specified are met. These alarms are:
• XTE alarm
• Depth alarm
Sea surface temperature alarm
• Speed alarm
Anchor watch alarm
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-11
How to open the [Alarm] menu
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Alarm].
2.10.1 XTE alarm
The XTE alarm tells you when your ship goes off course by more than the limit set
(XTE alarm boundaries).
1. Select the [ON] icon in [XTE Alarm] of the [Alarm] menu.
2. Select [XTE Value] from the [Route] menu to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value then select [Confirm].
4. Select [Close].
2.10.2 Depth alarm
The depth alarm tells you when the depth to the bottom is shallower than the value
you set. Requires depth data.
1. Select the [ON] icon in [Depth Alarm] of the [Alarm] menu.
2. Select [Depth Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value then select [Confirm].
4. Select [Close].
H
ar
d
ware
Al
ar
m
XTE
Al
arm
D
ept
h
Al
ar
m
D
ept
h
Al
arm
V
a
l
ue
S
ea
S
ur
f
ace Temperature Alar
m
T
emperature
Al
arm
V
a
l
ue
Temperature Alarm Ran
g
e Minimum Valu
e
Temperature Alarm Ran
g
e Maximum Value
Off
30.0
f
t
7
0.0
°
F
60
.
0
°
F
7
0.0
°
F
S
peed Alar
m
S
peed Alarm Value
A
n
cho
r
Wa
t
ch
Ala
r
m
A
nc
h
or
W
atc
h
Al
arm
V
a
l
ue
Notification Sound
A
larm
S
ound
50
S
ound Alarm Until Acknowled
g
ed
E
xternal Volume
R
eset De
f
ault
S
ettings
R
eset
S
ound
1
Off
10
.
0
kn
5
0
yd
S
ound
1
S
peed Alarm
O
utpu
t
Alarm
setting
Go to point
Intended
course
:Alarm area
Starting point
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-12
2.10.3 SST alarm
The sea surface temperature alarms tells you when the sea surface temperature is
over, under, within, or out of range of the temperature you set. Requires a temperature
sensor.
1. Select [Sea Surface Temperature Alarm] from the [Alarm] menu.
2. Select [Over], [Under], [Within] or [Out of]. For [Over] or [Under], go to the next
step. For [Within] or [Out of], go to step 5.
3. Select [Temperature Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the value for [Over] or [Under] then select [Confirm]. Go to step 9.
5. Select [Temperature Alarm Range Minimum Value] to display the software key-
board.
6. Set the minimum value for [Within] or [Out of] then select [Confirm].
7. Select [Temperature Alarm Range Maximum Value] to display the software key-
board.
8. Set the maximum value for [Within] or [Out of] then select [Confirm].
9. Select [Close].
2.10.4 Speed alarm
The speed alarm tells you when the speed of your ship is over or under the limit set.
Set the value at [Speed Alarm Value]. Requires a GPS navigator or speed sensor.
1. Select [Speed Alarm] from the [Alarm] menu.
2. Select [Under] or [Over].
Off
Over
Under
Within
Out of
Sea Surface Temperature Alarm
Off
Off
Under
Over
Speed Alarm
Off
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-13
3. Select [Speed Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the value for [Under] or [Over] then select [Confirm].
5. If you output the speed alarm from this equipment, select the [ON] icon in [Speed
Alarm Output].
6. Select [Close].
2.10.5 Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm tells you that your ship has moved a distance greater than
the set value when the ship must not be moving.
1. Select the [ON] icon in [Anchor Watch Alarm] of the [Alarm] menu.
2. Select [Anchor Watch Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value then select [Confirm].
4. Select [Close].
2.10.6 Alarm menus
The followings are the alarm menus not previously mentioned.
[Hardware Alarm]: This alarm alerts you when something is wrong with the hardware.
[Notification Sound]: Activate ([Sound 1 (2, 3)]) or deactivate ([Off]) the notification
sound (for "Waypoint Crossing" (see section 5.8), "End of Route" (section 4.10) or fish
finder alarms (section 7.9)).
Your ship's position where you
start the anchor watch alarm.
Alarm
setting
: Alarm area
Off
Sound 1
Sound 2
Sound 3
Notification Sound
Sound 1
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-14
[Alarm Sound]: Activate ([Sound 1 (2, 3)]) or deactivate ([Off]) the alarm buzzer.
[Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged]: Turn this item on to sound the aural alarm until an
alarm is acknowledged (see paragraph 2.10.7).
[External Volume]: Set the level for the external volume output.
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Alarm] menu.
2.10.7 How to stop the alarm sound
When an alarm is generated, the name of the offending alarm appears on the status
bar at the top of the screen and flashes. If [Alarm Sound] is active, the unit beeps. To
stop the flashing and silence the alarm, tap the status bar.
Note: If [Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged] is set for [OFF], the unit continues to beep
until the cause of the alarm is removed.
2.11 Track
The track (or movement) of your ship is plotted on the screen with position data. Your
track lets you see how your ship has moved.
The track is saved to the internal memory if the track is active. A line runs between
each track point. The internal memory stores a maximum of 30,000 track points. When
the memory for track points becomes full, the oldest track points are deleted to get
space for new track points.
Your track remains on the screen when the power is turned off. You can delete the
track that you do not need from the menu.
The saved track can be shown on the screen, and you can make a route with the
saved track.
Off
Sound 1
Sound 2
Sound 3
Alarm Sound
Sound 1
Anchor Alarm
Status bar
Alarm indication (eg: anchor watch alarm)
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-15
2.11.1 How to show or hide the track display
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. To show the track, select [Tracks]. To hide the track, deselect [Tracks].
2.11.2 Track interval
In drawing the track, the position of your ship is stored into the memory of this unit at
an interval of time. A shorter interval provides better reconstruction of the track, but
the storage time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the old-
est track is erased to make room for the latest.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Ship & Track].
3. Select [Track Interval].
4. Select a time interval.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
2.11.3 Track color
Track can be displayed in a single color or multiple colors. For multiple colors, you can
display the track according to the conditions shown below.
SST (Sea Surface Temperature)
• Speed
• Depth
• Bottom sediment
0’10s
0’30s
1’00s
5’00s
10’00s
Track Interval
0’30s
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-16
From the main menu
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Ship & Track] - [Track Color] menu.
3. Select [Fixed] or [Variable]. For [Fixed], go to the next step. For [Variable], go to
step 5.
4. Select [Fixed Color Setup] then select a color. Go to step 10.
5. Select [Variable Color] then select an option.
[Depth]: Change the color of the track with depth.
[SST]: Change the color of the track with change in sea surface temperature.
[Speed]: Change the color of the track with speed.
[Bottom Discrimination]: Change the color of the track with bottom sediment.
Track Color
Fixed
Variable
Fixed
Fixed Color Setup
Depth
SST
Speed
Bottom Discrimination
Variable Color
Depth
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-17
6. Select [Variable Color Setup].
7. For [Bottom Discrimination], select [Mud], [Sand], [Rock] or [Gravel]. For others,
select [Color 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)].
8. Select a color for each menu item.
[Depth]: Set the color for each depth range. For example, when the red icon is se-
lected in [Color 1], the track is red for depths from 5 to 10 ft.
[SST]: Set the color for each range of sea surface temperature. For example,
when the blue icon is selected in [Color 1] (temperature range: 10 to 15°F), the
track is blue for temperatures from 10 to 15°F.
[Speed]: Set the color for each speed range. For example, when the blue icon is
selected in [Color 1], the track is blue for speed from 0 to 5 kn.
[Bottom Discrimination]: Set the color for each bottom sediment. For example,
when the blue icon is selected in [Mud], the track where mud is found is blue.
For [Depth], [SST] and [Speed], you can change the threshold amount for each
color. Select a threshold amount to display the software keyboard. Set the value
then select [Confirm].
9. Select [Close].
10. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
For [Depth]
For [SST]
For [Speed]
For [Bottom Discrimination]
Threshold
amount
Color icon
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-18
On the screen
1. Select a track to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Color].
3. Select a color.
2.11.4 Track thickness
You can set the thickness of the track. If you are following the same track many times,
you can show the track in the thinnest width to prevent overlapping of track.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Ship & Track].
3. Drag the circle icon in [Track Thickness] to set the level.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
2.11.5 How to delete tracks
If the screen becomes full of track, you can not know which is the newer track. Delete
the track you do not need.
How to delete the selected history track
You can delete the selected history track. You can not delete the track currently re-
corded.
1. Select the track to delete. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Delete].
How to delete all tracks
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Ship & Track].
3. Select [Delete] in [Delete All Tracks].
The confirmation message appears.
4. Select [Yes].
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Yes No
Are you sure you want to delete all tracks? Important : all Navnet TZT have to be
connected for this operation.
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-19
2.11.6 How to turn on the automatic deleting of tracks
The internal memory stores a maximum of 30,000 track points. When the memory for
track points becomes full, the equipment automatically deletes the oldest track points
to get space for new track points.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Ship & Track].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [Automatic Track Deleting].
2.11.7 How to record tracks
You can record tracks as follows:
1. Select [Track Rec.] from the RotoKey menu. The track is plotted on the screen.
2. To stop plotting the track, select the track then select [Stop Track Rec.].
2.11.8 How to replay a saved track
You can replay a saved track on the screen to use the track to create a route.
1. Select the track to replay. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Follow Track]. The route (blue) is created on the track (red).
2.11.9 How to remove a replayed track
After you have used a replayed track, you can remove the track from the screen as
follows:
1. Select the replayed track to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Delete]. The red line is removed and the track remains as the route (blue
line).
2.11.10 Trackback
The trackback feature creates a route with your current track. This feature helps you
return along a previous track to get lobster pots, crab pots, and the like.
To use the trackback feature, select the active track to display the pop-up menu. Se-
lect [Track Back] to start operation as shown below.
A yellow line runs between your ship and the destination (the shortest course).
A thick red dashed line runs between first destination and point where the track back
starts.
Route points are automatically created.
Arrows on the track point in the direction to follow the route.
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-20
The XTE lines appear when you turn on these lines.
When you are following a route, you can do the following from the pop-up menu. Se-
lect the yellow line to display the pop-up menu.
[Stop Nav.]: Stop following the route.
[Restart Nav.]: Restart following the route.
[Skip Wpt]: Skip a waypoint.
[Rte Detail]: Open the [Route Detail] list.
[Edit]: Open the [Editing Route] window.
[Lists]: Open the lists.
[Extend]: Extend a route from the last point on the route.
For additional information, see the chapter 5.
Track
Activate
[Track Back]
First go
to point
Route
point
Yellow line: Shortest
course from the current
position to the go to point
Arrows point in
direction to follow route
0
1
2
3
Point where the
track back starts
Thick red dashed line:
Course between first go to
point and the point where
the [Track Back] function
starts
XTE lines
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-21
2.12 NAVpilot-700 Series Auto Pilot
The FURUNO NAVpilot-700 Series Auto Pilot installs in the TZT network. The follow-
ing functions can be controlled from a TZT display:
Displaying the NAVpilot-700 series data in the data boxes.
Selecting of steering mode (AUTO or NAV).
Note: When an alarm message for the NAVpilot-700 series appears, check the control
unit of the NAVpilot-700 series.
2.12.1 How to show the NAVpilot-700 series data in the data boxes
For details, see section 1.11.
1. Select [DATA 1], [DATA 2] or [RADAR] of the side menu at the left or right of the
screen to show a data box set.
2. Select a data box. The pop-up menu appears.
3. Select [Select Data].
4. Select [NAVPilot]. The NAVpilot-700 series data are displayed in the data boxes.
2.12.2 How to change the steering mode
How to activate AUTO mode
1. Select [Auto] in the data box to activate AUTO mode. The followings occur:
1) Two icons for the direction appear; the blue icon is for the set course, the gray
for the heading.
2) The indication for the steering modes ([Nav] and [Auto]) turns to the digital in-
dication of the set course with the W and X marks.
3) The blue line for CTS (course to steer) appears.
Compass box
NAVpilot-700
series data
10:30 AM
RADAR
AD
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
RADAR
D
AD
D
AD
D
AD
D
D
D
D
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
DATA
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
ATA
ATA
T
AT
AT
T
A
A
1
DATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
ATA
TA
TA
T
A
A
1
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
( )
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-22
2. Adjust the CTS line by the following two methods:
• Select W or X in the data box.
Select the CTS line to display the pop-up menu then select [Adjust]. Drag the
circle icon to set the angle then select [Done] at the top right-hand corner of the
screen.
3. Select the compass box to set the STBY mode. The blue line disappears and the
indication for the steering modes ([Nav] and [Auto]) appears.
Note: You can change the steering mode from AUTO to STBY with the pop-up
menu. Select the CTS line to display the pop-up menu then select [STBY].
231
10:30 AM
COG
°M
RADAR
D
D
D
D
D
AD
D
D
A
RADAR
D
D
D
AD
AD
D
D
A
DATA 2D
DATA 2
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA 2
D
D
D
A
DATA 1
ATA
AT
AT
T
AT
AT
A
DATA 1
ATAATA
ATA
ATA
TA
T
AT
A
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
90
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
( )
( )
Mode Auto (Adv)
Adjust
STBY
90 °
Done
Done
Drag the circle
icon to set the
angle.
Select the
CTS line.
Select
[Adjust].
10:30 AM
°M
RADAR
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
RADAR
D
D
D
D
D
AD
AD
A
DATA 2
DATA 2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
D
DATA 1
ATA
ATA
AT
T
AT
A
DATA 1
TA
TA
ATA
TA
TA
A
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
( )
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-23
How to activate NAV mode
The [Nav] icon in the data box is grayed out without an active point or route. To acti-
vate NAV mode, activate a point or route (see sections 4.10 and 5.8). The message
"Do you want to navigate using the NAVpilot?" appears on the screen (see the follow-
ing note). Select [Yes]. The steering mode automatically changes to NAV.
Note: You can turn on or off this message by the [Routes] - [Navigate with AutoPilot]
menu.
[ON]: When activating a point or route, the message appears.
[OFF]: When activating a point or route, the message does not appear.
1. Select [Nav] in the data box to activate NAV mode.
The COG vector points to the next route point. The indication for the steering
modes ([Nav] and [Auto]) turns to the indication for Next Wpt (waypoint).
2. Select the compass box to STBY mode. The indication for the steering modes
([Nav] and [Auto]) appears.
10:30 AM
°M
RADAR
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
RADAR
D
D
D
D
D
D
AD
AD
A
DATA 2
DATA 2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
D
DATA 1
ATA
ATA
AT
T
AT
A
DATA 1
ATA
TA
ATA
ATA
TA
A
8.9
36.1
72.81
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
8.9
36.1
72.81
8.9
36.1
72.81
( )
10:30 AM
RADAR
D
D
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
RADAR
D
D
D
D
D
AD
AD
A
DATA 2
DATA 2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
DATA 2
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
D
DATA 1
ATA
ATA
AT
T
AT
A
DATA 1
TA
TA
ATA
TA
TA
A
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
8.9
36.1
72.81
1
5
0
1
8
0
2
1
0
2
4
0
2
7
0
8.9
36.1
72.81
( )
Mode Nav (Eco)
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-24
2.13 Plotter Display Menu
This section describes the chart plotter menus. To open the following menus, select
[Menu] on the menu icon bar then select [Plotter Display].
[Day/Night Mode]: Select the color mode for best viewing in the current environment.
The options are [Automatic], [Day], [Dusk] and [Night].
[Chart Priority in Auto Mode]: Select the chart priority in auto mode from [Vector] and
[Raster].
[Chart Boundaries]: Show or hide the chart boundaries.
[Display Raster Chart Unit Legend]: Show or hide the [Raster chart unit] box at the bot-
tom left-hand corner of the screen. The unit for the depth values on the raster chart is
displayed in the [Raster chart unit] box.
[Grid Interval]: Select the grid interval on the plotter display. The options are [Off],
[Very Low], [Low], [Medium], [High] and [Very High].
[Tide/Current Icons Size]: Set the size of the icon for tide and current.
[Transparencies]
[PhotoFusion Transparency Offset]: Set the degree of transparency for the satellite
photo overlay. See paragraph 3.2.2.
[Tidal Currents Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the tidal currents.
D
a
y
/Ni
g
ht Mode
D
ay
yg
1
00
C
hart Boundaries
D
isplay Raster
C
hart Unit Legent
G
rid Interval
T
ide
/C
urrent Icons
S
ize
P
hotoFusion Transparency Offset
5
0
Tidal
C
urrents Transparency
D
epth
S
hading Transparenc
y
0
2
5
Radar
O
verlay Transparenc
y
R
adar Overlay Source
R
adar Overlay Range link
2
5
Ech
Ech
Ech
oC
oC
o
C
olo
olo
olo
rf
rf
r
f
or
or
or
Ove
Ove
Ove
rla
rla
rla
y
y
y
O
ff
T
ransparenc
i
es
R
adar Overla
y
A
ntenna Range
1
Mul
Mul
Mul
tic
tic
tic
olo
olo
olo
r
r
r
3
D Alti Exaggeratio
n
3
D Bathy Exaggeration
5
A
uto Depth Shading Color Scale
Mi
n
i
mum
V
a
l
ue
Maximum Value
Depth Color Shade
3D
Di
sp
l
ay
Depth
S
hading Value
s
R
eset De
f
ault
S
ettings
0
.
0
f
t
2
00
ft
ClassicHue
Reset
A
uto
3
D Alti Exaggeration
A
uto
3
D Bathy Exaggeratio
n
2
5
3D Di l
e
u
u
lu
alu
alu
alu
alu
alu
e
e
e
e
e
e
lu
a
a
e
e
e
e
e
alue
10
Chart Priority in Auto Mode
Raster
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-25
[Depth Shading Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the depth shading
on the water. See paragraph 3.2.1.
[Radar Overlay]
[Radar Overlay Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the radar echo.
[Radar Overlay Source]: Select the source for the radar echo from [Antenna Range1]
or [Antenna Range2].
[Radar Overlay Range link]: Activate or deactivate matching the overlay with radar
ranges.
[Echo Color for Overlay]: Select the color for the radar echo.
For the following menu items in the table, see chapter 3.
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the [Plot-
ter Display] menu.
Menu item Reference
[3D Display]
[Auto 3D Alti Exaggeration]
[3D Alti Exaggeration]
[Auto 3D Bathy Exaggeration]
[3D Bathy Exaggeration]
See paragraph 3.1.3.
[Depth Shading Values]
[Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]
• [Minimum Value]
• [Maximum Value]
• [Depth Color Shade]
See paragraph 3.2.1.
2. CHART PLOTTER
2-26
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-1
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3.1 3D Display
The 3D display has native 3D chart design that allows full time 3D presentation. This
true 3D environment gives you all of the information you require with no restrictions on
the information you can see. You can plan your routes, enter points, etc. like on the
2D chart.
The 3D display provides a 3D view of land and sea around your ship. The 3D display
has most of the same information as the 2D display. With both presentations available
you can see the conditions around your ship from different angles. The 3D display
helps you navigate when you are in waters that you do not know. Also, most functions
of the 2D display, for example, destination setting, are available in the 3D display.
For best results make sure you have accurate position and heading data.
3.1.1 Aerial view
The aerial view is the view you get when you activate the 3D display. Your position is
above and behind your ship, and your view is in the forward direction. The illustration
shown below provides an example of how you can change the orientation of the aerial
view display. This illustration shows the view from starboard side of the ship.
3D display, aerial view
Boat icon (your ship)
Point
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-2
3.1.2 How to activate the 3D display
1. Select [3D] from the RotoKey menu. You
can also switch 2D to 3D by dragging two
fingers upward or downward.
2. Orientate the 3D display by dragging sideways with two fingers.
To switch to 2D, select [2D Mode] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
3.1.3 How to make the 3D view clearer
In the 3D display, some topographical features are easier to see if you use the 3D ex-
aggeration feature. This feature expands both objects on the chart and the underwater
vertically so that you can easily see the shape of the objects and position. There are
two methods for 3D exaggeration: automatic and manual.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Plotter Display].
3. Automatic method
:
Select the [ON] icon in [Auto 3D Alti Exaggeration] or [Auto 3D Bathy Exaggera-
tion].
Manual method
:
Select [3D Alti Exaggeration] or [3D Bathy Exaggeration].
[3D Alti Exaggeration]: Drag the circle icon to set the level for altitude.
[3D Bathy Exaggeration]: Drag the circle icon to set the level for bathymetry.
Drag upward or downward.
or
5
3D Alti Exaggeration
3D Bathy Exaggeration
Auto 3D Alti Exaggeration
Auto 3D Bathy Exaggeration
3D Display
10
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-3
High gives the highest level of exaggeration. The example below compares the
same picture in low and high exaggerations.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
3.2 Overlays
Radar, satellite photo, depth shading, tide icons, tidal currents, etc. overlays are avail-
able on the chart plotter display.
3.2.1 Depth shading overlay
The depth shading overlay shows the depths in different color (the default settings are
red (shallow), yellow (medium) and blue (deep)). This overlay is available in both 2D
and 3D presentations. Use this overlay to find depths. To show the depth shading
overlay, select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu then select [Dpth Shade]. To hide
the depth shading overlay, deselect [Dpth Shade].
High exaggeration
Low exaggeration
Depth shading
Depth shading color scale
RADAR DATA 2 DATA 1
4,791 NM
0.0 ft
950 ft
Auto
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-4
Depth shading settings
The depth shading settings are on the [Plotter Display] menu of the main menu. Set
these menus by following the description shown below.
[Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]: Turn automatic depth shading color scale selection
on or off.
[Minimum Value]: Set the minimum depth range for which to show depth shading, with
the software keyboard. This is available when [Auto Depth Shading Color Scale] is set
to [OFF].
[Maximum Value]: Set the maximum depth range for which to show depth shading,
with the software keyboard. This is available when [Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]
is set to [OFF].
200 ft
0.0 ft
ON
OFF: [Auto] is grayed out.
On the screen, you can turn on or off the automatic depth shading color scale with tapping here.
0.0 ft
950 ft
Auto
0.0 ft
950 ft
Auto
On the screen, you can set the minimum and maximum value.
For minimum value For maximum value
164 ft
2. Drag to set
each value.
Slide bar
1. Tap the desired position to display the slide bar.
0.0 ft
300 ft
Auto
RADAR DATA 2 DATA 1
0.0 ft
300 ft
Auto
4,744 NM
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-5
[Depth Color Shade]: Select how to display the depth colors among [ClassicHue], [In-
vertedClassicHue], [RedHue], [BlueHue], [GreenHue] and [YellowHue].
3.2.2 Satellite photo overlay
You can put the satellite photo for your area on the 2D and 3D displays. Select [Over-
lay] from the RotoKey menu then select [Sat Photo].
High resolution satellite images for the USA coastline are not provided standard, but
are available at no cost (except shipping and handling). Users can install multiple sat-
ellite photos on the hard drive of the NavNet TZtouch. The illustration below shows the
vector chart with the satellite photo overlay.
How to set satellite photo transparency on water
You can set the degree of transparency for the satellite photo on the water.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Plotter Display].
3. Drag the circle icon in [PhotoFusion Transparency Offset] to set the level (setting
range: 0 to 80%).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
ClassicHue
InvertedClassicHue
RedHue
BlueHue
GreenHue
Depth Color Shade
ClassicHue
Colors of the rainbow
Shades of red
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-6
3.2.3 Radar overlay
The radar overlay display puts the radar picture on the top of the navigation chart. To
display the radar overlay, select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu then select [Radar].
How to switch between stand-by and TX
To transmit, select [Radar] from the RotoKey menu then select [Tx Radar]. To get
stand-by, deselect [Tx Radar].
How to set the level of the radar echo transparency
RotoKey menu: Select the [Radar] - [Transparency] menu. Drag the circle icon to set
the level.
Main menu
: Select [Plotter Display]. Drag the circle icon to set the level in [Radar
Overlay Transparency].
How to match the overlay and radar ranges
Select [Plotter Display] of the main menu. Select the [ON] icon in [Radar Overlay
Range link].
How to adjust radar gain, sea, rain
The gain and sea and rain clutters can be adjusted from the radar overlay. Select [Ra-
dar] from the RotoKey menu. For automatic adjustment, select [Auto Gain], [Auto Sea]
or [Auto Rain]. For manual adjustment, select [Manual Gain], [Manual Sea] or [Manual
Rain] then drag the circle icon to set each level. See section 6.2, section 6.3 or
section 6.4.
How to display the echo trail
Select [Radar] from the RotoKey menu then select [Echo Trail] to display the echo
trail. To hide the echo trail, deselect [Echo Trail].
To clear the echo trail, select [Radar] from the RotoKey menu then select [Clear Trail].
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-7
How to select the echo color
Select the [Plotter Display] - [Echo Color for Overlay] menu of the main menu. Select
[Multicolor], [Green] or [Yellow].
How to acquire a target for ARPA
A target can be acquired for ARPA. See paragraph 6.26.2.
3.2.4 Tide icon overlay
The NavNet TZtouch has worldwide tidal and tidal current information. You can over-
lay this information on the chart plotter display. The tide icon ( ) appears at the loca-
tions of tidal recording stations.
How to display the tide icon overlay
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Tide Icons].
The arrow on the tide icon is up when the tide is high, or is down when the tide is low.
The tide icon is gray and yellow according to the tide state. The tide icon is all yellow
when the tide is high completely and all gray when the tide is low completely.
Multicolor
Green
Yellow
Echo Color for Overlay
Multicolor
Tide icon
(yellow and/
or gray)
: Up arrow indicates the tide is going high.
: Down arrow indicates the tide is going low.
: No arrow indicates no change in tide.
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-8
How to change the size of the tide icon
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Plotter Display].
3. Drag the circle icon in [Tide/Current Icons Size] to set size (setting range: 50 to
150%).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
How to show the tide information
Select a tide icon to display the information (name,
date, tide height and tide status) about a tide.
How to display the tide graph
On the screen: Select a tide icon then select [Info] from the pop-up menu. You can
display the tide graph to select the call-out for the tide information instead of the [In-
fo] pop-up menu.
From the [Tides] menu: Select [Tides] on the menu icon bar. The tide graph for the
closest tidal station to the current position opens.
Time scale
Tide height at the selected time
Clock mark
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-9
How to understand the tide graph
Vertical axis: Height, Horizontal axis: Time
The information is mostly accurate under moderate weather conditions. However,
storms and weather fronts can influence forecasted tide times and heights.
Drag the time scale at the bottom of the screen sideways then read the tide height
at the selected time (drag to the left to display the future information, right for the
past information).
To set the time scale to the current time, select the clock mark at the bottom left-
hand corner of the screen. The color of the clock mark turns gold.
To return to the chart plotter display, select [Close] at the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
3.2.5 Tidal current overlay
The tidal current overlay is made from the tidal current data received from NOAA sat-
ellites, available in North America.
How to display the tidal current overlay
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Currents].
Arrows of more than one color and size appear on the screen and are pointing in
different directions.
The arrow indicates the movement of the tidal current. The size and color of the arrow
indicate the tidal current speed (yellow: slow, orange: medium, red: fast).
Clock mark for the current time
Clock mark except the current time
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-10
How to change the tidal current icon size
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Plotter Display].
3. Drag the circle icon in [Tide/Current Icons Size] to set size (setting range: 50 to
150%).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
How to show the tidal current information
Select a tidal current icon to display the infor-
mation (speed, direction and tide status) about
a tidal current.
How to display the tidal current graph
Select a tidal current icon then select [Info] from the pop-up menu. You can display the
tidal current graph to select the call-out for the tidal current information instead of the
[Info] pop-up menu.
Speed
Direction
Tide Status
0.9 kn
Flow 72.5
°
M
Slack
Time scale
Tidal current speed at the selected time
Clock mark
0.9 kn
Rising
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-11
How to understand the tidal current graph
Vertical axis: Speed, Horizontal axis: Time
The information is mostly accurate under moderate weather conditions. However,
storms and weather fronts can influence forecasted tidal current directions and
speeds.
Drag the time scale at the bottom of the screen sideways then read the tidal current
speed at the selected time (drag to the left to display the future information, right for
the past information).
To set the time scale to the current time, select the clock mark at the bottom left-
hand corner of the screen. The color of the clock mark turns gold.
To return to the chart plotter display, select [Close] at the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
Clock mark for the current time
Clock mark except the current time
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS
3-12
This page is intentionally left blank.
4-1
4. POINTS
4.1 About Points
In navigation terminology, a point is any location you put on the chart plotter display.
A point can be a fishing spot, reference point and other important locations. You can
use a point you have entered to set a destination.
This unit has 30,000 points into which you can enter position information.
When you enter a point, the point is put on the
screen with the point symbol selected as the
default point symbol. The position of the point,
symbol and color information are saved to the points list. You can show or hide the
points, and the default setting shows all points.
You can edit a point on the screen or the points list.
Note: Points can be shared with other TZT units via LAN. Data is shared automatical-
ly; no operation is required.
4.2 How to Put a Point or an Event Mark
4.2.1 How to put a point
1. Select the position to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [New Point] or [Lat/Lon]. To set the position accurately, select [Lat/Lon]
then go to the next step.
3. Set the position referring to steps 2 and 3 in paragraph 4.7.1.
4. Select [Confirm]. The [Editing Point] window appears.
5. Select [Save].
The following occurs.
The default point symbol is put at the selected position.
The point is saved to the points list.
Default point symbol
(black circle in yellow circle)
Point
4. POINTS
4-2
4.2.2 How to put an event mark
This function is available by touch control when you select [Event] in [General] - [Func-
tion Gesture] of the main menu (see section 1.14).
1. Tap the screen with two fingers.
You can open the above window from the [Event] RotoKey menu.
2. Select a desired mark.
The following occurs.
The selected mark is put at the position, at the time the RotoKey
TM
was pushed or
the screen was tapped to open the [Creating Event] window.
The event mark is saved to the points list.
Most of the operations are common in points and event marks.
4.3 How to Display the Point Information
Select a point to display the information (name, depth, com-
ment, bearing and range) about a point.
For an event mark, the comment is automatically entered ac-
cording to the setting in the [Points] menu.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main
menu.
2. Select the [Points] - [Data to Be Recorded in Event Comment] menu.
3. Select an option.
[None]: No comment
[Date]: Date
Cancel
Creating Event
Name
Depth
Comment
POINT1
443 ft
Bearing
Range
17.9 °M
0.822 NM
None
Date
SST
Date And SST
Data to Be Recorded in Event Comment
None
4. POINTS
4-3
[SST]: Sea surface temperature
[Date And SST]: Date and sea surface temperature
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Example: [Date And SST]
Screenshot in the information area
You can display a screenshot, at the time when tapping the screen with two fingers to
put an event mark, in the information area. Select [Points] of the main menu. Select
the [ON] icon in [Add Screen Capture to Event].
To delete all screenshots for event marks in the information area, do the following:
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Points] - [Delete All Event Pictures] menu. The confirmation message
appears
3. Select [Yes].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
4.4 Default Point Settings
When you save a point, the equipment saves the point according to the shape, color,
size and type set on [Points] of the main menu. If those settings do not meet your re-
quirements, you can change the settings as shown below.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
Name
Depth
Comment
35.7 ft
73.1°F
8/7/2012 11:41:38 AM
Bearing
Range
115.5 °M
0.514 NM
Are you sure you want to delete all event pictures? Important : all Navnet TZT
have to be connected for this operation.
Yes
No
4. POINTS
4-4
2. Select [Points].
3. Select [Default Point Symbol], [Default Point Color], [Point Size] or [Icons Set]. Be-
low are the options for [Default Point Symbol], [Default Point Color] and [Icons
Set].
4. Select an option or set the level.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Display Points Names
Default Point Symbol
Default Point Color
Point Size
Icon Set
Modern
Data to Be Recorded in Event Comment None
Event Configuration
Delete All Points & Routes
Delete All Event Pictures
Reset Default Settings
㪘㪻㪻㩷㪪㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㩷㪚㪸㫇㫋㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋
Config.
Delete
Delete
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋
100
Scroll marks (Indicate options currently not shown in the window.
You can see the options currently not shown by dragging.)
[Default Point Symbol] [Default Point Color]
Default Point Symbol
Default Point Color
Classic
Modern
Icons Set
Modern
[Icons Set]
4. POINTS
4-5
4.5 How to Move a Point
You can move a point by two methods, on the screen and from the points list.
4.5.1 How to move a point on the screen
1. Select the point to move. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Move]. The selected point is highlighted.
3. Move the point to the new position by dragging the point or tapping the new posi-
tion.
4. Select [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
4.5.2 How to move a point from the points list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
You can also open the lists menu from the [Display] - [Lists] of the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points list.
3. Select [Name], [Color], [Icon] or [Range] in the [Sort by] area at the top of the list.
[Name]: Points sorted in alphanumeric order
[Color]: Points sorted by color in order of red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, black
& white, yellow, orange
[Icon]: Points sorted by symbol shape order
[Range]: Points sorted by range in ascending order
4. Select the point to move then select [Edit] to display the [Editing Point] window.
You can also open the [Editing Point] window on the screen. Select the point to
move then select [Edit] from the pop-up menu.
5. Select [Position] to display the software keyboard.
6. Enter the position then select [Confirm].
7. Select [Save]. If you opened the [Editing Point] window on the screen, you do not
need to do step 8.
8. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
You can also open the points list from the RotoKey menu instead of steps 1 and 2.
See section 1.13.
4.6 How to Delete a Point
You can delete points by two methods, on the screen and from the points list. The
point currently set as a go to point cannot be deleted.
4.6.1 How to delete a point on the screen
1. Select the point to delete. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Delete].
4. POINTS
4-6
4.6.2 How to delete a point from the points list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points list.
3. Select [Name], [Color], [Icon] or [Range] in the [Sort by] area at the top of the list.
[Name]: Points sorted in alphanumeric order
[Color]: Points sorted by color in order of red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, black
& white, yellow, orange
[Icon]: Points sorted by symbol shape order
[Range]: Points sorted by range in ascending order
4. Select the point to delete then select [Delete]. The point disappears from both the
screen and the points list.
5. Select [Close].
4.6.3 How to delete all points
You can delete all points from the [Points] menu. When there is an active route, this
function is not available.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Points] - [Delete All Points & Routes] menu. The confirmation message
appears.
3. Select [Yes].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
4.7 How to Edit a Point
You can edit the points which you have entered by two methods, on the screen and
from the points list.
4.7.1 How to edit a point on the screen
1. Select the point to edit then select [Edit] from the pop-up menu. You can display
the [Editing Point] window to select the call-out for the point information instead of
the [Edit] pop-up menu.
Are you sure you want to delete all points and routes? Important : all Navnet TZT
have to be connected for this operation.
Yes
No
Point
POINT1
4. POINTS
4-7
2. To change the name of the point, select [Name] to display the software keyboard.
Change the name as follows:
1) Select the character to edit. For example, "1" is selected in the following figure.
2) Select an alphanumeric character from the software keyboard.
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to complete the name. The maximum length of the
name is 20 alphanumeric characters.
4) Select [Confirm].
3. To change the position, select [Position] to display the software keyboard. Set the
position referring to step 2.
4. Select [Color] to change the color of the point symbol.
5. Select a color.
6. Select [Icon] to change the point symbol.
7. Select a symbol.
8. Select [Comment] to display the software keyboard.
9. Enter the comment for the point.
10. Select [Confirm].
11. Select [Save].
Select this to switch to the
numeric software keyboard.
Select this to switch to the
alphabet software keyboard.
Numeric software keyboard
Alphabet software keyboard
: Delete the character selected.
: Clear all characters.
Cursor
Cancel
Confirm
Cancel
Confirm
Del.
Clr.
Select position format.
“N” and “S” appear when the cursor is on
“N”. When you select “W”, “N” and “S” are
replaced with “E” and “W”.
Confirm
Cancel
Clr
123
456
789
0
3
N
Clr
123
456
789
0
Confirm
Cancel
4. POINTS
4-8
4.7.2 How to edit a point from the points list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points
list.
3. Select [Name], [Color], [Icon] or [Range]
in the [Sort by] area at the top of the list.
[Name]: Points sorted in alphanumeric
order
[Color]: Points sorted by color in order of
red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, black &
white, yellow, orange
[Icon]: Points sorted by symbol shape or-
der
[Range]: Points sorted by range in as-
cending order
4. Select the point to edit then select [Edit].
Points List
Sort by :
Name
Color Icon
Range
Range 1,893 NM
Range 0,705 NM
Range 1,835 NM
Range 0,562 NM
Range 2,867 NM
Range 3,464 NM
Range 3,205 NM
Range 1,285 NM
Range 1,962 NM
Range 3,234 NM
Edit
Add to route
Goto
POINT1
N 43
°
04.617’; W 65
°
42.642’
Point
Range
1,893 NM
4. POINTS
4-9
5. To change the name of the point, select [Name] to display the software keyboard.
Change the name as follows:
1) Select the character to edit. For example, "1" is selected in the following figure.
2) Select an alphanumeric character from the software keyboard.
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to complete the name. A name can have a maximum
of 20 alphanumeric characters.
4) Select [Confirm].
6. To change the position, select [Position] to display the software keyboard. Set the
position referring to step 5.
7. Select [Color] to change the color of the point symbol.
8. Select a color.
9. Select [Icon] to change the point symbol.
10. Select a symbol.
11. Select [Comment] to display the software keyboard.
12. Enter the comment for the point.
13. Select [Confirm].
14. Select [Save].
15. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Select this to switch to the
numeric software keyboard.
Select this to switch to the
alphabet software keyboard.
Numeric software keyboard
Alphabet software keyboard
: Delete the character selected.
: Clear all characters.
Cursor
Cancel
Confirm
Cancel
Confirm
Del.
Clr.
Select position format.
“N” and “S” appear when the cursor is on
“N”. When you select “W”, “N” and “S” are
replaced with “E” and “W”.
Confirm
Cancel
Clr
123
456
789
0
3
N
Clr
123
456
789
0
Confirm
Cancel
4. POINTS
4-10
4.8 How to Find a Point
You can easily move a point to the center of the screen from the points list.
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points list.
3. Select [Name], [Color], [Icon] or [Range] in the [Sort by] area at the top of the list.
4. Select the point to find then select [Find On Chart].
The menu closes and the selected point is put at the center of the screen on the
active chart plotter display.
Note: When you use this function in the split-screen display, the split-screen dis-
play is replaced with the full-screen display.
4.9 How to Show or Hide All Points or Points Names
Points
You can show or hide all points.
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. To show all points, select [Points]. To hide all points, deselect [Points].
Points Names
You can show or hide all points names.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Points].
3. To show all points names, select the [ON] icon in [Display Points Names]. To hide
all points names, select the [OFF] icon.
4.10 How to Go to a Point
Select the point to go to among the three methods shown below.
Select the point on the screen
Select a position on the screen
Select the point from the points list
After you have selected a point, you can do the following.
Restart the cross-track error (XTE) indication.
Stop and restart Go To. (Select the boat icon to display the pop-up menu. Select
[Stop Nav.] and [Restart Nav.] respectively.)
Note: Before you try to go to a point, make sure that the path to the point is clear. Make
sure to zoom your chart to check for hazards which appear on a smaller scale.
4. POINTS
4-11
4.10.1 How to go to an on-screen point
1. Select the point to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Go To].
The following occurs:
The go to point is highlighted.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line appear. The thick red dashed line is the
course to follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the
current position to the go to point.
The go to point is numbered "1" and the position where the [Go To] function starts
is numbered "0".
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the go to point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see
paragraph 5.9.9). Then the message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end
of a route. For the arrival timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
The route is saved to the routes list.
Go to point
XTE (Cross-track Error)
Boat icon (current position)
How arrival is “judged”
Arrival area
[Circle and Cross Line]
Cross line
Ship arrives to arrival area or ship
passes an imaginary perpendicular
line passing through center of
destination waypoint.
[Circle]
Ship arrives to
arrival area.
Cross line
[Cross Line]
Ship passes an imaginary
perpendicular line passing
through center of destina-
tion waypoint.
Yellow line: Shortest
course from the current
position to the go to point.
Thick red dashed line:
Course between the go to
point and the point where
the [Go To] function starts.
Arrival area (Appears when
you select [Circle and
Cross Line] or [Circle] in
the [Routes] - [Waypoint
Switching Mode] menu.)
XTE lines (Red: port, Green: starboard)
0
0
1
1
4. POINTS
4-12
4.10.2 How to go to a position selected on screen
You can set a position as a point to go to without saving the point. The point is erased
when the navigation is cancelled or the power is turned off.
1. Select the position to set as a point to go to. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Go To].
The following occurs:
The go to point is highlighted.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line appear. The thick red dashed line is the
course to follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the
current position to the go to point.
The go to point is numbered "1" and the position where the [Go To] function starts
is numbered "0".
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the go to point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see
paragraph 5.9.9). Then the message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end
of a route. For the arrival timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
Go to point
XTE (Cross-track Error)
Boat icon (current position)
Yellow line: Shortest
course from the current
position to the go to point.
Thick red dashed line:
Course between the go to
point and the point where
the [Go To] function starts.
A
rrival area (Appears when
you select [Circle and
Cross Line] or [Circle] in
the [Routes] - [Waypoint
Switching Mode] menu.)
XTE lines (Red: port, Green: starboard)
0
0
1
1
4. POINTS
4-13
4.10.3 How to go to a point selected from the points list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points list.
3. Select [Name], [Color], [Icon] or [Range] in the [Sort by] area.
4. Select the point to go to then select [Goto].
5. Select [Close] to close the points list.
The following occurs:
The go to point is highlighted.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line appear. The thick red dashed line is the
course to follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the
current position to the go to point.
The go to point is numbered "1" and the position where the [Go To] function starts
is numbered "0".
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the go to point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see
paragraph 5.9.9). Then the message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end
of a route. For the arrival timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
Edit
Add to route
Goto
POINT1
N 43
°
04.617’; W 65
°
42.642’
Range
1,893 NM
4. POINTS
4-14
4.10.4 How to display the point information for the active route
1. Select the yellow line to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Rte Detail]. The [Route Detail] window appears.
3. Select [Close] to close the route detail list.
4.11 How to Restart and Cancel Navigation to a Point
4.11.1 How to restart navigation to a point
When you go to a point, you can restart
the navigation to the point from the cur-
rent location.
When you steer to keep away from an
obstruction or the ship drifts, you go off
course as shown in Line 1 in the figure.
If you do not need to return to the origi-
nal course, you can go to the point from
the current position as shown in Line 2 in
the figure.
1. Select the red dashed line or the yellow line of the route to display the pop-up
menu.
2. Select [Restart Nav.]. The route start position for the route moves to the current
position.
4.11.2 How to cancel navigation to a point
1. Select the go to point, red dashed line or the yellow line of the route, to display the
pop-up menu.
2. Select [Stop Nav.].
The red dashed line, yellow line, XTE lines and arrival area circle are erased from the
screen.
CTS: Course To Steer, TTG: Time To Go
Line 2
Line 1
Obstacle
Original course
5-1
5. ROUTES
5.1 What is a Route?
A route is a series of route points entered in the order to use for navigation. A route
can contain up to a maximum of 500 route points, and this equipment stores 200
routes.
Note: When connecting NavNet 3D units on the LAN network, a route can contain up
to a maximum of 100 route points.
You create a route by selecting geographical positions on the screen. These positions
are marked with blue squares.
You can follow a route that you have created, with the [Go To] feature. When you fol-
low a route, the current leg is shown as a red dashed line and the previous leg is
shown as a light gray line.
The routes on the screen can be edited from the pop-up menu. With this pop-up menu,
you can
Insert route points in a route
Move route points in a route
Delete route points from a route
• Extend a route
• Split routes
Find information about a route
Delete a route
Set a route as destination
Follow a route in the reverse direction
Ignore a route point when following a route
Note: Active routes can be shared with other TZT units via LAN. Data is shared auto-
matically; no operation is required.
5.2 How to Create a Route
5.2.1 How to create a new route
1. Select the 1st route point for the route to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [New Route]. The flag mark appears on the selected position.
3. Select the next route point in the route. A blue line with arrow runs between the
previous route point and the next route point. The arrow points in the direction of
route flow.
5. ROUTES
5-2
4. Select the next route point in the route.
Repeat this step to enter all route points. Each route point is numbered.
5. At the last route point, select [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route. The flag mark disappears and the following window ap-
pears.
The route is automatically named. The default route name is “RTE” plus the date
(e.g. RTE 2012-03-01). Select [Save]. If necessary, select [Rename] to change
the route name. The route is saved to the routes list.
5.2.2 How to create a new route from a point
You can create a route from a point.
1. Select a point to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [New Route]. The flag mark as below appears on the point.
3. Select the next route point in the route. A blue line with arrow runs between the
previous point and the next route point. The arrow points in the direction of route
flow.
4. Select the next route point in the route.
Repeat this step to enter all route points. Each route point is numbered.
1st route point (starting point)
2nd route point
3rd route point
4th route point
1
1
2
3
4
Route leg
A new route has been created under this name:
Rename
Save
Cancel
RTE 2012-03-01
1
1
Selected point (starting point)
2nd route point
3rd route point
4th route point
2
3
4
5. ROUTES
5-3
5. At the last route point, select [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route. The flag mark disappears and the following window ap-
pears.
The route is automatically named. The default route name is “RTE” plus the date
(e.g. RTE 2012-03-01). Select [Save]. If necessary, select [Rename] to change
the route name. The route is saved to the routes list.
5.2.3 How to insert a route point on a route
You can insert a new route point on a route leg.
1. Select a position on a route leg to insert a route point.
2. Select [Insert] from the pop-up menu. The blue square marks the position selected
and is highlighted. The route point is numbered according to its position in the
route, and the succeeding route points are renumbered.
3. Select [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
5.2.4 How to move a route point on a route
You can move a route point on a route.
1. Select a route point on a route to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Move]. The selected route point is highlighted.
A new route has been created under this name:
Rename
Save
Cancel
RTE 2012-03-01
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
4
4
5. ROUTES
5-4
3. Move the route point to the new position by dragging the route point or tapping the
new position.
4. Select [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
5.2.5 How to delete a point or route point on a route
You can delete a point or route point on a route.
1. Select the point or route point to delete. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Delete]. The selected point or route point is deleted, and the succeeding
route points are renumbered.
5.2.6 How to remove a point from a route
You can remove a point from a route.
1. Select the point to remove. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Remove]. The selected point is removed from the route, and the succeed-
ing route points are renumbered.
5.2.7 How to extend a route
You can extend a route from the last route point on the route.
1. Select a route leg to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Extend].
3. Select a position. A blue line with arrow runs from the last route point to the se-
lected position.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter more route points, if necessary.
5. At the last route point, select [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route and save the route to the routes list.
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
3
3
5. ROUTES
5-5
5.2.8 How to split a route
You can divide a route in two to make two routes.
1. Select the route leg where to divide the route. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Split].
The selected route leg is deleted and the route is divided. The new route is given the
new route name and saved to the routes list.
5.3 Routes List
The created routes are stored in the routes list, where you can edit or see the route
data. The list stores the following route data for each route (the number for each item
below has links to the number in the figure at step 3):
1) Name of a route
2) Length of a route
3) Names of starting route point and last route point (Enter them with the software
keyboard.)
4) Color of a route
5) Comment for a route
6) Each number of each route point
7) Bearing to steer
8) Planning route speed (see section 5.11)
9) Distance between legs and total distance
10)TTG between legs and total TTG
To open the routes list:
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Routes List] to open the routes list.
Split route here
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
2
3
4
New route
5. ROUTES
5-6
3. Select the route to view then select [Edit] or [Route Detail]. The route data ap-
pears.
You can edit the route data in the [Editing Route] window. For detailed information of
the editing procedures, refer to section 4.7.
You can open the routes list from the screen. Select a route to get route information.
The pop-up menu appears. To open the routes list, select [Lists] then select [Routes
List]. To open the [Route Detail] window, select [Rte Detail]. To open the [Editing
Route] window, select [Edit].
RTE 2012-03-01
Edit
Route Detail
Goto
RTE 2012-03-01
2.299NM
From
Length
To
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6) 7) 8) 9) 10)
3/1/2012
5. ROUTES
5-7
5.4 How to Join Points to Create a Route
You can join points which you have entered to create a route from the points list.
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Points List] to open the points list.
3. Select a point to add a route.
4. Select [Add to route].
5. Select the next point to add a route.
6. Select [Add to route].
7. Repeat these steps to add all points then select [Close]. The route is created and
automatically named. Each point is numbered and the route is saved to the routes
list.
5.5 How to Find a Route on the Chart
You can easily find the location of a route from [Routes List]. The selected route is put
at the center of the active chart plotter display.
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Routes List] to open the routes list.
3. Select a route then select [Find On Chart] from the options. The menu closes then
the selected route is displayed at the center of the chart plotter display.
Edit
Add to route
Goto
POINT1
N 43
°
04.617’; W 65
°
42.642’
Range
1,959 NM
3
3
4
4
2
2
1
1
Edit
Route Detail
Goto
2.299NM
From
Length
To
Drag to display
the option [Find
On Chart].
RTE 2012-03-01
5. ROUTES
5-8
5.6 How to Delete a Route
You can delete routes separately or together. An active route cannot be deleted.
5.6.1 How to delete a route on the screen
1. Select a route leg of a route to delete. The pop-up menu appears.
2. Select [Delete].
5.6.2 How to delete a route from the routes list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Routes List] to open the routes list.
3. Select the route to delete then select [Delete] from the options. The route disap-
pears from both the screen and the routes list.
4. Select [Close].
5.6.3 How to delete all routes
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Routes] - [Delete All Points & Routes] menu. The confirmation mes-
sage appears.
3. Select [Yes].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5.7 How to Show or Hide All Routes
All routes can be shown or hidden. An active route cannot be hidden from the screen
unless route following is stopped.
1. Select [Overlay] from the RotoKey menu.
2. To show all routes, select [Routes]. To hide all routes, deselect [Routes].
5.8 How to Follow a Route
Before you follow a route, make sure that the path to the route is clear. Make sure to
zoom your chart to check for hazards that do not appear on a smaller scale.
5.8.1 How to follow an on-screen route
1. Select a route leg of the route to follow. The pop-up menu appears.
Are you sure you want to delete all points and routes? Important : all Navnet TZT
have to be connected for this operation.
Yes
No
5. ROUTES
5-9
2. Select [Activate].
The following occurs:
The line for the selected route turns red.
The go to point (1st route point) is highlighted.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line run between the current position and the
1st route point of the selected route. The thick red dashed line is the course to follow
to get to the 1st route point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the current
position to the go to point.
The go to point is numbered "1" and the position where the [Go To] function starts
is numbered "0".
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach a go to point, turn on [Waypoint Cross-
ing Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see paragraph 5.9.8). Then the mes-
sage "Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a go to point. For the arrival
timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
5.8.2 How to follow a route selected from the routes list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [Routes List] to open the routes list.
3. Select the route to follow then select [Goto] from the options.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
The following occurs:
The line for the selected route turns red.
The go to point (1st route point) is highlighted.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line run between the current position and the
1st route point of the selected route. The thick red dashed line is the course to follow
1
1
Arrow marks in direction to follow route
Route leg (red line)
Course to 1st route point
(thick red dashed line)
Boat icon
(current position)
0
0
Arrival area (appears when
you select [Circle and
Cross Line] or [Circle] in
the [Routes] - [Waypoint
Switching Mode] menu.)
2
3
4
5. ROUTES
5-10
to get to the 1st route point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the current
position to the go to point.
The go to point is numbered "1" and the position where the [Go To] function starts
is numbered "0".
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach a go to point, turn on [Waypoint Cross-
ing Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see paragraph 5.9.8). Then the mes-
sage "Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a go to point. For the arrival
timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
5.8.3 How to start navigation from a route point
1. Select the route point of the route from where to start navigation. The pop-up
menu appears.
2. Select [Activate From].
In the above example, the following occurs:
The route point "3" is selected to start navigation from, and is highlighted.
The current position is numbered "2" and the numbers of the previous route points
decrease one by one.
The line from "3" to the route point "5" for the selected route turns red and the legs
for "0" and "1" turn gray.
A thick red dashed line and a yellow line run between the current position "2" and
the "3" route point. The thick red dashed line is the course to follow to get to the
route point "3". The yellow line is the shortest course from the current position to the
route point “3”.
The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see paragraph 5.9.5).
The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Display XTE Lines] on [Routes] of the main menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach a go to point, turn on [Waypoint Cross-
ing Notification] on [Routes] of the main menu (see paragraph 5.9.8). Then the mes-
sage "Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a go to point. For the arrival
timing, see paragraph 5.9.5.
0
0
1
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
2
2
5. ROUTES
5-11
5.8.4 How to show the detailed information about a route
1. Select a route leg of the route to get the detailed information. The pop-up menu
appears.
2. Select [Rte Detail]. The [Route Detail] window for the selected route opens (see
section 5.3).
5.8.5 Flyover
The flyover feature lets you view an entire route from overhead, with the display auto-
matically scrolled as the flyover progresses.
1. Select a route leg to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Fly Over]. The cursor travels back and forth between the first route point
and the last route point on the selected route.
The picture rotates with the cursor movement and the cursor moves upward on
the screen.
3. To stop the flyover feature, select [End Fly Over] at the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
Cursor
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
Travel forward
Travel backward
5. ROUTES
5-12
5.9 Operations When You Follow a Route
5.9.1 How to restart navigation
When you follow a route, you can re-
start the navigation to the next route
point on the route from current location.
When you steer to keep away from an
obstruction or the ship drifts, you go off
course as shown in Line 1 in the figure.
If you do not need to return to the origi-
nal course, you can go to the route point
from the current position as shown in
Line 2 in the figure.
1. Select a route leg, the red dashed line or the yellow line of the route to display the
pop-up menu.
2. Select [Restart Nav.]. The route start position for the route moves to the current
position.
5.9.2 How to follow a route in the reverse direction
You can follow a route in reverse order. This helps you return along the same path.
Note: This function is not available for an active route.
1. Select a route leg to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Reverse]. The arrows on the route legs are in reverse direction and the
numbers of the route points are in reverse order.
5.9.3 How to stop following a route
1. Select a route leg, a route point or a thick red dashed line on an active route to
display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Stop Nav.]. The arrival area, XTE lines, set course (thick red dashed line)
and yellow line are erased from the screen. The red line for the route turns the de-
fault color you set.
5.9.4 How to skip a go to point on a route
There are times when you do not need to follow all legs in an active route. You can
skip a go to point (highlighted) as shown in the procedure below. After you select
the go to point to skip, the skipped route leg turns from red to gray.
When you select the go to point of the active route, select [Skip] from the pop-
up menu. The selected go to point is skipped then the next route point is marked as
the go to point.
When you select a route leg of the active route, select [Skip Wpt] from the pop-
up menu. The go to point on the route is skipped then the next route point is marked
as the go to point.
Line 2
Line 1
Obstacle
Original course
5. ROUTES
5-13
5.9.5 Waypoint switching mode
When you arrive to a route point, your unit automatically changes to the next route
point according to the waypoint switching mode selected on the menu.
[Cross Line]: Change the waypoint when the ship moves through an imaginary cross
line (vertical line) that passes through the center of the destination point.
[Circle]: Change the waypoint when the ship comes within the circle.
[Circle and Cross Line]: Change the waypoint when one of the above two conditions
is met.
A red dashed circle appears when you select [Circle and Cross Line] or [Circle].
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Routes] - [Waypoint Switching Mode] menu.
3. Select [Circle and Cross Line], [Circle] or [Cross Line]. For [Circle and Cross Line]
or [Circle], go to the next step. For [Cross Line], go to step 6.
4. Select [Switching Circle Radius] to display the software keyboard.
5. Set the arrival area (circle radius) then [Confirm].
6. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5.9.6 Route auto zoom
You can get automatic range change after you have moved past the go to point. Use
this feature to find the next go to point in the route when the next go to point is not
within the current display range.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Routes].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [Route Auto Zoom] to activate the route auto zoom, or the
[OFF] icon to deactivate the route auto zoom.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
[Circle and Cross Line]
Arrival area
Cross line
[Circle]
[Cross Line]
Cross line
The value for the circle
radius is set in [Switching
Circle Radius].
Circle and Cross Line
Circle
Cross Line
Waypoint Switching Mode
Circle and Cross Line
5. ROUTES
5-14
5.9.7 XTE lines
The XTE line for port side is red, for starboard side it is green.
You can show or hide these lines.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Routes].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [Display XTE Lines] to show the XTE
lines, the [OFF] icon to hide the XTE lines. For [ON], go to the
next step.
4. Select [XTE Value] to display the software keyboard.
5. Set the length of the XTE lines (the distance from your ship)
to display then select [Confirm].
6. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5.9.8 Waypoint arrival notification
The waypoint arrival notification feature releases audio and visual notifications when
your ship reaches a go to point. For the arrival timing, see paragraph 5.9.5. The noti-
fication message "Waypoint Crossing" appears. Activate or deactivate this feature as
follows.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Routes].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [Waypoint Crossing Notification] to activate this feature, the
[OFF] icon to deactivate this feature.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5.9.9 End of route notification
The end of route notification feature releases audio and visual notifications when your
ship reaches the end of a route. For the arrival timing, see paragraph 5.9.5. The noti-
fication message "End of Route" appears. Activate or deactivate this feature as fol-
lows.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Routes].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [End of Route Notification] to activate this feature, the
[OFF] icon to deactivate this feature.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
XTE lines
(Red: port,
Green: starboard)
5. ROUTES
5-15
5.10 Fuel Level
You can display the fuel level on the screen. The fuel flow or fuel level data is required.
Fuel Max Range
You can display a pump icon on the route where it is predicted that the fuel supply will
be exhausted. Select [Routes] of the main menu. Select the [ON] icon in [Fuel Max
Range].
Fuel range ring
You can display a circle, within which you can navigate with the remaining fuel, around
your ship. Select [Ship & Track] of the main menu. Select the [ON] icon in [Fuel Range
Ring].
5.11 Routes Menu
This section provides descriptions for the menu items in [Routes] of the main menu
not previously mentioned.
ㆬᛯ
Default Route Color
Route Thickness
2
Ask to Enter Route Name
Great Circle Navigation
Waypoint Switching Mode
Fuel Max Range
Maximum Dist. Between Waypoints
Route Auto Zoom
Switching Circle Radius
Waypoint Crossing Notification
End of Route Notification
Intelligent Route Waypoint Centering
Display XTE Lines
XTE Value
Delete
Default Planning Route Speed
Delete All Point & Routes
Reset Default Settings
Reset
5.0 kn
200.0 NM
Circle and Cross Line
70 yd
100 yd
Navigate with AutoPilot
5. ROUTES
5-16
[Default Route Color]: Select the color of the routes. The options are red, blue, green,
yellow, magenta, orange, cyan, or black & white.
[Route Thickness]: Select the thickness of the routes.
[Navigate with AutoPilot]: See "How to activate NAV mode" on page 2-23.
[Ask to Enter Route Name]: Show or hide the window for the route name (see the il-
lustration at step 5 in paragraph 5.2.1) when you create a new route.
[Great Circle Navigation]: Great circle is the shortest line that joins two points on the
surface of the earth. Select the [ON] icon to automatically enter the waypoint with great
circle line when you create the route.
[Maximum Dist. Between Waypoints]: Set the maximum distance between route
points when [Great Circle Navigation] is [ON].
[Intelligent Route Waypoint Centering]: When you create a route, center a route point
each time it is selected on the screen.
[Default Planning Route Speed]: Set the planning route speed (see section 5.3).
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Routes] menu.
6-1
6. RADAR
This chapter provides the information necessary for radar operation.
6.1 How to Transmit, Set the Radar in Stand-by,
Tune
Transmission, stand-by
Press the Home key (or tap the Home icon) to show the display selection window then
select the radar display. Push the RotoKey
TM
(or tap the screen) to show the RotoKey
menu then select [Tx Radar] to transmit.
If you do not require the radar for some time, set the radar in stand-by to save the mag-
netron from unnecessary use. Push the RotoKey
TM
(or tap the screen) to show the
RotoKey menu then deselect [Tx Radar] to set the radar in stand-by.
You can switch the radar between transmit and stand-by by tapping the radar scale
box at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.
Tuning
In default, the radar receiver is tuned automatically after turning the radar to TX. If you
require fine tuning, do the following to tune manually:
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Radar].
3. In default, the automatic tuning turns on. First turn off the automatic tuning. Select
the [OFF] icon in [Auto Tuning].
4. Drag the circle icon in [Manual Tuning] to set the value.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
TX mode
Stand-by mode
For TZTBB, tap the area circumscribed above to switch between TX and Stand-by.
Note: You can set the range from the radar scale box by tapping the range indication
(see section 6.5).
Range Range
Radar scale box Radar scale box
6. RADAR
6-2
6.2 How to Adjust the Gain
You can adjust the gain (sensitivity) of the radar receiver. The correct setting shows
some background noise on the screen. If you do not use enough gain, weak echoes
are erased. If you use more gain than necessary, the background noise hides both
weak and strong targets.
Automatic gain adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Auto Gain].
Manual gain adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Manual Gain].
Note: If [Auto Gain] is checked, first deselect [Auto Gain].
3. Drag the circle icon to set the level (see the figure below).
[RADAR] side menu
You can switch the method of the gain adjustment between automatic and manual
with the [RADAR] side menu at the left or right side of the screen. You can also man-
ually adjust the gain from this side menu.
DATA 1 DATA 2 RADAR
“A” is highlighted in auto adjustment.
“M” is highlighted in manual adjustment.
Side menu
(at the left or
right side of
the screen)
Switching
Manual
adjustment
Each time you select here, the
mode is switched between
automatic and manual.
DRS_RADOME
DRS_RADOME
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
0
Drag the circle
icon to set the
level.
6. RADAR
6-3
6.3 How to Reduce the Sea Clutter
The reflected echoes from waves appear at the central part of the screen and have
the name "sea clutter". The sea clutter increases in width as the height of waves and
the height of the antenna above the water increase. If the sea clutter is strong, targets
can be hidden inside the clutter, like in the left-hand figure shown below.
When the sea clutter hides targets, adjust the sea control (automatically or manually)
to reduce the clutter. After the sea clutter is gone, turn off the sea control to prevent
the loss of targets.
Automatic sea clutter adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Auto Sea].
For automatic sea clutter suppression, there are two methods: [Advanced] and
[Coastal]. [Advanced] provides for standard suppression of sea clutter and is intended
for normal use. [Coastal] suppresses sea clutter further than does [Advanced] and
paints land and target echoes thicker. Use [Coastal] when you are cruising along a
coastline. To select an automatic sea clutter suppression method, select [Auto Sea
Mode] from the RotoKey menu followed by [Advanced] or [Coastal].
Manual sea clutter adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Manual Sea].
Note: If [Auto Sea] is checked, first deselect [Auto Sea].
3. Drag the circle icon to set the level.
You can switch the method of the sea clutter adjustment between automatic and man-
ual with the [RADAR] side menu at the left side of the screen. You can also adjust the
sea clutter from this side menu (see "[RADAR] side menu" in section 6.2).
Sea clutter at
screen center
Sea control adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
6. RADAR
6-4
6.4 How to Reduce the Rain Clutter
When your ship is in or near rain or snow, the reflections from the rain or snow appear
on the screen. These reflections have the name “rain clutter”. When the rain clutter is
strong, targets in or near the rain clutter are hidden in the clutter. Reflections from the
rain clutter are easily identified from true targets by their wool-like appearance.
The rain control breaks the continuous display of rain or snow reflections into a ran-
dom pattern. The rain control also helps to reduce the target clutter in good weather
in busy harbors.
When the rain clutter hides targets, adjust the rain control (automatic or manual) to re-
duce the clutter. After the rain clutter is gone, turn off the rain control to prevent the
loss of targets.
Automatic rain clutter adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Auto Rain].
Manual rain clutter adjustment
1. Select [Radar Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Manual Rain].
Note: If [Auto Rain] is checked, first deselect [Auto Rain].
3. Drag the circle icon to set the level.
You can switch the method of the rain clutter adjustment between automatic and man-
ual with the [RADAR] side menu at the left side of the screen. You can also adjust the
rain clutter from this side menu (see "[RADAR] side menu" in section 6.2).
6.5 Range Scale
The range setting controls the size of the area (in nautical miles, kilometers or statute
miles) that appears on your screen. The range and range ring interval appear at the
bottom left-hand corner of the screen.
How to zoom in or out the range scale
TZT9/TZT14: Rotate the RotoKey
TM
or pinch the radar screen.
Range
Range ring interval
Zoom in
Zoom out
6. RADAR
6-5
TZTBB: Pinch the radar screen. Or tap the radar scale box at the bottom left-hand cor-
ner of the screen to display the slider bar. Drag the circle icon to set the range scale.
6.6 Orientation Mode
The orientation mode controls the relationship between your ship and all the other tar-
gets.
The heading data is required in the north-up mode. When the heading data is lost, the
orientation mode automatically goes to head-up. Restore the compass signal to show
the heading indication. Select the orientation mode again if necessary.
To select an orientation mode, select [Orientation] from the RotoKey menu then select
[Head Up] or [North Up]. (You can also select an orientation mode with the Radar pop-
up menu.)
Head-up
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the
line that connects the center with the top of the
screen indicates your heading. Targets are shown at
their measured distances and in their directions rela-
tive to your heading.
North-up
Targets are shown at their measured distances and
their true (compass) directions from your ship. North
is at the top of the screen. The heading line changes
its direction according to your heading.
Tap the area circled above to display the
slider bar.
Note: You can toggle between transmit and
stand-by by tapping the right side of the
radar scale box (see section 6.1).
Drag the circle
icon to set the
range scale.
Slider bar
Zoom in
Zoom out
4NM
Current
range
Heading line
Heading line
6. RADAR
6-6
6.7 How to Measure the Range and Bearing from
Your Ship to a Target
You can measure the range or bearing to a target by the following four methods.
6.7.1 How to display the range rings
Use the fixed range rings to get a rough estimate of the range to a target. These rings
are the concentric solid circles about your ship.
To display the range rings, select [Rings] from the RotoKey menu. To hide the range
rings, deselect [Rings].
The interval is displayed at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. To measure the
range with the range rings, count the number of rings between the center of the screen
and the target. Check the range ring interval and estimate the distance of the echo
from the inner edge of the nearest ring.
6.7.2 How to set the number of the range rings
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Rings Interval] menu.
3. Select the number. [Auto] automatically selects the number of rings according to
the range scale.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Range measurement Bearing measurement
Fixed range rings Yes No
Ruler Yes Yes
VRM (Variable Range
Marker)
Yes No
EBL (Electronic Bear-
ing Line)
No Yes
Auto
1
2
3
4
Rings Interval
Auto
6. RADAR
6-7
6.7.3 How to select the range rings mode
To select the range rings mode, select the [Radar] - [Bearing Scale Mode] menu of the
main menu then select [Relative] or [True].
Relative
True
Bearing Scale Mode
Relative
Relative: Bearing scale is fixed and “0” is
at the top of the screen.
Boat
icon
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
North (“0”)
Heading
line
Bearing
scale
True: Bearing scale rotates according to
the movement of your ship.
Head-up mode
North-up mode
Relative: Bearing scale rotates according
to the movement of your ship.
True: Bearing scale is fixed and “0” is at
the top of the screen.
Boat
icon
Bearing
scale
Heading
line
6. RADAR
6-8
6.7.4 How to measure the range and bearing with the ruler
Select an object to get the range and bearing. Read the range and bearing in the box.
6.7.5 How to measure the range with the VRM
The VRM is a dashed ring so that you can identify the ring from the fixed range rings.
1. Select [VRM] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Adjust].
3. Drag the circle icon to put the VRM on the inner edge of the target. Read the range
to the target at the left side of the circle icon.
4. Select [End VRM] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the slider bar.
To delete the VRM, select [VRM] - [Clear] from the RotoKey menu.
You can operate the VRM from a pop-up menu.
Object
Range 3.716 NM
Bearing 109.5
°
Range 3.716 NM
Bearing 109.5
°
End VRM
RA
RA
2
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
DATA
2
RADAR
RADAR
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
ADAR
ADAR
DATA
DATA
4.718NM
VRM
Target
Circle icon
Range to
the target
6. RADAR
6-9
6.7.6 How to measure the bearing with the EBL
The EBL is a straight dashed line from the center of the screen to the edge.
1. Select [EBL] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Adjust].
3. Drag the circle icon to put the EBL on the center of the target. Read the bearing
to the target at the left side of the circle icon.
4. Select [End EBL] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the slider bar.
To delete the EBL, select [EBL] - [Clear] from the RotoKey menu.
You can operate the EBL from a pop-up menu.
6.7.7 How to select the EBL reference
You can select the EBL reference from [True] or [Relative]. [True] means the bearing
is in reference to the north. [Relative] means the bearing is relative to the heading of
your ship. True bearing requires a heading sensor.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [EBL Reference] menu.
3. Select [True] or [Relative].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
End EBL
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DA
DA
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 2
RADAR
RADAR
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
ATA 1
ATA
1
295.2 º
EBL
Target
Circle icon
Bearing to
the target
Relative
True
EBL Reference
Relative
6. RADAR
6-10
6.8 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between
Two Targets
You can measure the range and bearing between any two targets with the [Measure]
menu.
1. Select the center of the target A to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Measure].
3. Select the center of the target B. A dashed line runs between the target A and the
target B. The range and bearing between the targets A and B are shown.
4. Select [Cancel Ruler] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the indi-
cation.
6.9 How to Off-center the Picture
You can off-center your position to expand the view field without selecting a larger
range scale. The position can be off-centered in the bow, stern, port or starboard di-
rection, but not more than 75% of the range in use.
Pan the radar display by dragging with a finger. To return your ship to the center of the
screen, select [Center Radar] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
6.10 Heading Line
The heading line indicates your heading in all orientation modes. This line connects
between your position to the outer edge of the radar display. The line is at zero de-
grees on the bearing scale in the head-up mode. The orientation of the line changes
in the north-up mode with the movement of your ship. If it is hard to identify the echoes
on the heading line, you can hide the heading line and range rings for a few seconds.
Select [Hdg Ln Off] from the RotoKey menu to activate this function.
Target A
Target B
Range and bearing
M: Magnetic
0.876NM
76.4°M
0.876NM
76.4°M
Normal picture
Picture off-centered in stern direction
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
6. RADAR
6-11
6.11 How to Reduce Radar Interference
Radar interference can occur when your ship is near
the radar of another ship that operates on the same
frequency band with your radar. The interference
shows on the screen in many bright dots. The dots
can be random or in the shape of dotted lines that run
from the center to the edge of the screen. You can
identify the interference from the normal echoes, be-
cause the interference does not appear in the same
location at the next rotation of the antenna.
Turn off the interference rejector when there is no in-
terference to prevent the loss of weak targets.
1. Select [Radar Filters] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Int Reject].
To deactivate the interference rejector, deselect [Int Reject] at step 2.
6.12 Guard Zone
The purpose of the guard zone is to provide audio and visual warnings against targets
(ships, islands, landmasses, etc.) that enter the area you set.
6.12.1 How to set the guard zone
1. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Visible]. The guard zone with dotted lines appears on the screen.
3. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
4. Select [Resize]. Four circles appear at the four corners of the guard zone.
5. Move the circles to set the guard zone.
Note: To set a 360-degree guard zone, set the same bearing for all four circles.
6. Select [End Resize] at the top right-hand corner of the screen. Four circles disap-
pear.
6.12.2 How to activate or deactivate the guard zone
1. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Alarm]. The dotted lines for the guard zone turn to solid lines.
If a target enters the zone, the alarm sounds. The audio alarm continues until the tar-
get leaves the guard zone or the guard alarm is deactivated. To deactivate the guard
zone, deselect [Alarm] at step 2.
You can mute the audio alarm by selecting [Off] in the [Alarm] - [Alarm Sound] menu
of the main menu (paragraph 2.10.6).
6. RADAR
6-12
6.12.3 How to hide the guard zone
1. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Deselect [Visible]. The guard zone disappears from the screen.
Note: This operation is available when the guard zone is deactivated.
6.12.4 Guard zone menus
There are four sub menus in [Guard Zone]; [Visible], [Alarm], [Auto Acquire] (see
paragraph 6.26.3) and [Resize]. When the guard zone is visible, you can select these
sub menus from both the RotoKey menu and pop-up menu. To display the pop-up
menu, select anywhere on the lines of the guard zone.
6.13 Watchman
The watchman feature transmits the radar for one minute at a specified time interval
(5, 10 or 20 minutes) to monitor the guard zone. If a target is found in the guard zone,
the watchman is cancelled and the radar continues to transmit. This feature helps you
watch for targets in the area you set when you do not continuously require the radar.
1. Set a guard zone. See section 6.12. (Watchman does not operate unless a guard
zone is active. You can set Watchman when the radar is in transmit state.)
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select the [Radar] - [Watchman] menu.
4. Select a watchman rest interval.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6. Select [Watchman] from the RotoKey menu to activate the watchman function.
1 min 1 min
TX TXST-BY ST-BY
Watchman starts
5, 10 or
20 min
5, 10 or
20 min
500s
1000s
2000s
Watchman
500s
6. RADAR
6-13
6.14 Echo Trails
Echo trails show the movements of radar targets relative or true to your ship in imita-
tion afterglow. This function helps alert you to possible collision conditions.
6.14.1 How to show or hide echo trails
To show the echo trails, select [Echo Trail] from the RotoKey menu. To hide the echo
trails, deselect [Echo Trail].
6.14.2 How to clear echo trails to restart new echo trails
Select [Clear Trail] from the RotoKey menu to clear echo trails and restart with new
echo trails.
6.14.3 Echo trail time
You can set the trail time. Trails are shown on the screen until the end of the selected
trail time then the trails are erased and restarted.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Trail Length] menu.
3. Select a time interval.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
0’15s
0’30s
1’00s
3’00s
6’00s
Trail Length
0’15s
6. RADAR
6-14
6.14.4 Echo trail mode (reference)
Trail movement can be set for relative or true. The relative trails show the relative
movements between targets and your ship. True motion trails show the movements of
targets according to the targets over-the-ground speeds and courses. True trails re-
quire position and heading information.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Trail Mode] menu.
3. Select [Relative] or [True].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6.14.5 Echo trail color
Trail color can be selected to blue, yellow or green.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Trail Color] menu.
3. Select a color desired.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
(a) True target trials
(No smearing of stationary targets)
(b) Relative target trials
(Targets moving relative to your ship)
Relative
True
Trail Mode
True
Trail Color
6. RADAR
6-15
6.14.6 Echo trail shading
The echo trail can be shown in gradual shading or monotone (single shade). The fig-
ure below is an example when you select blue in the [Radar] - [Trail Color] menu.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Trail Shade] menu.
3. Select [Single] or [Multi].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6.15 Echo Stretch
The radar adjusts the reflected echoes from long-range targets, but the echoes are
normally displayed weak and small. If you have a weak, long-range target that re-
quires closer inspection, use the echo stretch to magnify the target.
This function magnifies the targets and sea clutter and radar interference. For this rea-
son, correctly adjust the sea clutter and radar interference before you activate the
echo stretch.
1. Select [Radar Filters] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Stretch].
To deactivate the echo stretch, deselect [Stretch] at step 2.
6.16 Echo Average
The echo average feature effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from
stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position during
every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter
appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-
scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over suc-
cessive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal in-
tensity. The sea clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced
brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets from the sea clutter.
[Single]
(Monotone shading)
[Multi]
(Gradual shading)
Object
Single
Multi
Trail Shade
Multi
6. RADAR
6-16
To properly use the echo average function, first suppress the sea clutter.
1. Select [Radar Filters] from the
RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Average].
To deactivate the echo average, deselect
[Average] at step 2.
6.17 Sweep Fade
The sweep fade feature automatically reduces the brilliance of weak signals (noise,
sea clutter, rain clutter, etc.) and unnecessary echoes like radar interference to clear
the picture. Use the sweep fade when unnecessary echoes cannot be reduced by oth-
er methods.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Radar].
3. Select the [ON] icon to activate the sweep fade, the [OFF] icon to deactivate the
sweep fade in [Sweep Fade].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6.18 How to Show, Hide or Cancel an Active Route
You can show or hide the active route from the radar display. To show the active route,
select [Active Rte] from the RotoKey menu. To hide the active route, deselect [Active
Rte].
To cancel route navigation, select the go to point, boat icon or any of the lines (no. 1
to 4 in the figure below) which appear when [Active Rte] turns on, then select [Stop
Nav.] from the pop-up menu.
a) Echo average OFF
b) Echo average ON
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
1
1
2
3
4
Go to point
Go to point
Your ship
Your ship
s position
s position
6. RADAR
6-17
6.19 How to Show or Hide the Boat Icon
You can show or hide the boat icon on the radar display.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Radar].
3. Select the [ON] icon to show the boat icon, the [OFF] icon to hide the boat icon in
[Own Ship Icon].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6.20 Echo Color
Echo color is available in colors of green, yellow or multicolor.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Echo Color] menu.
3. Select a color.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
6.21 Background Color
You can select the background color for daytime and nighttime operations.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Radar] - [Day Background Color] or [Night Background Color] menu.
3. Select [Black], [Dark Blue] or [White] (daytime only).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Multicolor
Green
Yellow
Echo Color
Multicolor
Black
Dark Blue
White
Day Background Color
Black
Black
Dark Blue
Night Background Color
Black
6. RADAR
6-18
6.22 Radar Overlay Range Link
The radar overlay range link automatically keeps the chart scale and radar range in
sync. This feature helps you understand the relation between the radar and the chart.
You can activate or deactivate this feature from [Plotter Display]. See paragraph 3.2.3.
Note: The radar picture can look “out of focus” on long ranges when the range link is
active. This out of focus appearance does not indicate a problem, because it is a char-
acteristic of the digital zoom.
6.23 Dual-Range Display
The dual-range display scans and displays two different radar ranges at the same
time, with a single antenna. There is no time delay between the two pictures and you
have separate control of each picture. This feature lets you keep a close watch on
close-range targets and far targets.
To get the dual-range display, set dual-range displays in the display selection window.
See section 13.2 for the procedure. You can put the dual-range displays in the two-
way and three-way split screens.
The radar functions that are adjusted separately are as follows:
*: The no.1 screen is independent of the no.2 screen when the no.2 screen is in stand-
by. However, when the no.2 screen goes to transmit state, so does the no.1 screen.
Active route (show or hide) Gain
Rain (rain clutter) Sea (sea clutter)
Heading line and rings (hide temporarily) AIS/DSC (show or hide)
Range Range rings (show or hide)
Orientation mode (head-up or north-up) Trail (clear to restart)
Auto sea mode ([Advanced] or [Coastal]) • Interference rejector
Transmission* (Can not set stand-by mode separately)
Short range displayLong range display
Two-way split
Three-way split
No.1
screen
No.2
screen
No.1
screen
No.2
screen
No.1
screen
No.2
screen
No.2
screen
No.1
screen
6. RADAR
6-19
6.24 FAR-2xx7 Radar Series and NavNet TZtouch
The FAR-2xx7 radar series* can be connected to your NavNet TZtouch, and some
functions can be controlled from the NavNet TZtouch. The table below shows which
features can be controlled from the NavNet TZtouch. Note that you should turn off
Guard Polygon at the radar to control the radar from the NavNet TZtouch.
*: B type, and IMO type program no. 02.50 or before and 3.13 or later.
Function
Controllable from
NavNet
Remarks
AIS data (LAN) No
AIS data (NMEA 0183) No
AIS data display Yes
ARPA acquisition, cancella-
tion
Yes
Auto Gain No
Auto Rain No
Auto Sea Yes Value of Auto Sea is “0”.
Automatic ARPA target ac-
quisition
No
Dual range mode No
Echo average No
Gain Yes Manual only.
Installation setting (tuning,
antenna rotation speed,
etc.)
No
Manual ARPA target acqui-
sition, cancel
Yes Max no. of targets is 100.
Position, time data Yes Shared via LAN
Range scale Yes 0.0625, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 36,
64, 72, 120 not available with
IMO type. 72 nm not available
with B type.
Selection of range unit No Fixed at “NM”.
Source selection, picture
display
Yes
TX/STBY Yes
Watchman No
6. RADAR
6-20
6.25 How to Understand the Radar Display
6.25.1 False echoes
Echo signals can appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disap-
pear where there are targets. You can identify false targets when you understand why
the false echoes appear. A description of false echoes follows.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes can be seen on the
screen at two, three or more times the true range of the target as shown below. You
can reduce and sometimes remove these multiple echoes if you decrease the gain, or
correctly adjust the sea clutter.
Virtual image
A large target near your ship can show at two positions on the screen. One of the po-
sitions is the true echo reflected by the target. The other position is a false echo which
is caused by the “mirror effect” of a large object on or near your ship. See the figure
shown below for an example of this type of false echo. If your ship gets near a large
metal bridge, for example, a false echo appears on the screen. The echo disappears
after move some distance from the bridge.
Own ship
Target
True
echo
Multiple
echo
Target ship
Your ship
True
echo
False
echo
Mirror image
of target ship
Route for direct reflection
Bridge
Route for
indirect reflection
6. RADAR
6-21
Shadow sector
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna stop the radar beam. If
the angle opposite the antenna is more than one or two degrees, a sector or shadow
sector appears on the screen. Targets are not displayed within the sector.
Sidelobe echoes
Each time the radar transmits, some radiation leaves on each side of the beam. This
lost energy has the name "sidelobes." If a target is detected by both the sidelobes and
the mainlobe, the sidelobe echoes can appear at both sides of the true echo at the
same range. Sidelobes normally show only on short ranges and from strong targets.
You can reduce sidelobes if you reduce the gain, or correctly adjust the sea clutter.
Radar position
Large ship
Wharf and its echo
Shadow sector
occurs because
wharf is hidden
behind ship.
Radar position
Wharf and its echo
Shadow sector occurs
because obstruction
(like mast) is in path of
radar beam.
Size of blind sector depends on
size of obstruction and range.
Mainlobe (beam)
Sidelobe Sidelobe
Antenna
True target
False echoes by sidelobes
6. RADAR
6-22
6.25.2 Search and rescue transponder (SART)
A ship in distress uses a radar-SART to show a series of dots on the radar display of
nearby ships to indicate distress. A SART transmits when it receives a radar pulse
from any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. When a SART
receives a radar pulse, the SART transmits a response across all the radar frequency
band.
How to detect the SART response
Use the range scale of 6 or 12 NM. The distance between the SART responses is
approximately 0.6 NM (1125 m) to identify the SART.
Turn off all the automatic clutter filters.
Turn off the interference rejector.
Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder that sends a characteristic signal when the racon re-
ceives a radar pulse (normally only the three-centimeter band). If the racon signal is
sent on the same frequency as that of the radar, the signal appears on the radar dis-
play. The racon signal appears on the radar in one of two methods:
A line that starts just after the position of the Racon
A Morse code signal displayed with a line just after the position of the Racon
Radar antenna beamwidth
Screen A: When SART is distant
Screen B: When SART is close
Position of
SART
24 NM
1.5 NM
Own ship position
Own ship position
Echo from SART
(Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.)
Own ship position
Own ship position
Position of
SART
6. RADAR
6-23
6.26 ARPA Operation
The ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) shows the movement of a maximum of 30
radar targets. The targets can be acquired manually or automatically. All 30 targets
can be acquired manually when the ARPA acquisition area is not active. If the ARPA
acquisition area is active, that total is equally divided between manual and auto acqui-
sition.
ARPA requires speed and heading data.
6.26.1 How to show or hide the ARPA display
1. Select [Targets] from the RotoKey menu on the chart plotter or radar display.
2. Select [ARPA] to show the ARPA display.
To hide the ARPA display, deselect [ARPA] at step 2.
6.26.2 How to manually acquire a target
You can manually acquire a target from both the radar display and the radar display
overlay.
1. Select an object to acquire. The pop-up menu appears.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not a
substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
· This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and speed,
indicating them by a vector. Since the data
generated by the auto plotter are based on
what radar targets are selected, the radar
must always be optimally tuned for use
with the auto plotter, to ensure required
targets will not be lost or unwanted targets
such as sea returns and noise will not be
acquired and tracked.
· A target does not always mean a
landmass, reef, ships or other surface
vessels but can imply returns from sea
surface and clutter. As the level of clutter
changes with environment, the operator
should properly adjust the Sea, Rain and
Gain to be sure target echoes are not
eliminated from the radar screen.
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
· Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual amount
depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
· The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15 - 30
seconds for high relative speed; 30 - 60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
· Echo intensity
· Radar transmission pulsewidth
· Radar bearing error
· Gyrocompass error
· Course change (your ship or target)
6. RADAR
6-24
2. Select [Acquire].
After you acquire a target, the radar marks the target with a broken square and a vec-
tor appears within 30 s. The vector indicates the direction of the target. Within 90 s
after you acquire the target, the first tracking step is finished and the target is tracked
continuously. At this point, the broken square changes to a solid circle.
Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target must be within 0.05 to 16 NM from your
ship and not hidden in sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, you cannot acquire
more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets to acquire additional targets
manually.
6.26.3 How to automatically acquire a target
Any target that enters the ARPA acquisition area is acquired and tracked automatical-
ly. When a target enters the area, the buzzer sounds.
1. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Visible]. The guard zone with dotted lines appears on the screen.
3. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
4. Select [Resize]. Four circles appear at the four corners of the guard zone.
5. Move the circles to set the guard zone.
Note: To set a 360-degree guard zone, set the same bearing for all four circles.
6. Select [End Resize] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
7. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
8. Select [Auto Acquire]. The dotted lines for the guard zone turn the solid lines.
9. Select [Guard Zone] from the RotoKey menu.
10. Select [Alarm].
To erase the guard zone, deselect [Alarm], [Auto Acquire], [Visible] in the [Guard
Zone] menu in order.
ARPA
Symbol
Meaning
At acquisition of the target.
30 s after the acquisition, the plotting symbol changes to a small circle,
which indicates steady-state tracking. A vector appears to show the direc-
tion of the target.
A lost target is indicated by a diamond symbol, created from two equal tri-
angles.
6. RADAR
6-25
6.26.4 How to display target data
You can find the bearing, range, etc. of an ARPA target. Select the ARPA target to get
its information. For detailed information, select the ARPA target to display the pop-up
menu then select [Info]. The detailed information display can also be shown by select-
ing the simple information display.
6.26.5 How to stop tracking targets
You can stop tracking ARPA targets separately or all together.
Individual target
1. Select the ARPA target to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Cancel] to delete the target from the screen.
All targets
1. Select [Targets] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Cancel All] to delete all targets from the screen.
6.26.6 How to clear a lost target
An ARPA target not detected in five scans becomes a lost target. You can clear lost
targets separately or all together.
Individual lost target
1. Select the lost target to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Clear] to delete the lost target from the screen.
All lost targets
1. Select [Targets] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Clear Lost] to delete all lost targets from the screen.
Simple information
Detailed information
S
S
6. RADAR
6-26
6.26.7 CPA/TCPA alarm
This alarm helps you keep your ship away from collision by warning of targets on a
collision course. The ARPA continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest
Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each tracked target.
When the predicted CPA or TCPA is less than their set values, the alarm sounds and
the message "CPA/TCPA Alarm" appears and flashes at the top of the screen.
Make sure that the gain, sea and rain controls are correctly adjusted before you use
this alarm.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set correctly according to the size, tonnage, speed,
turning performance and other characteristics of your ship.
How to set the CPA/TCPA alarm
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Targets].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
4. Select [CPA Alarm Value] or [TCPA Alarm Value] to display the software key-
board.
5. Set the value then select [Confirm].
6. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
How to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm
The CPA/TCPA alarm sounds when the CPA and TCPA of an ARPA target are within
the CPA/TCPA alarm range. The alarm indication "CPA/TCPA Alarm" appears and
flashes at the top of the screen. To acknowledge the alarm and stop the audio alarm
and flashing of the indication, select (tap) the indication "CPA/TCPA Alarm" (see
paragraph 2.10.7). (The ARPA vector must be displayed at least 30 seconds to calcu-
late CPA and TCPA.)
How to deactivate the CPA/TCPA alarm
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Targets].
3. Select the [OFF] icon in [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7-1
7. FISH FINDER
This chapter describes the functions of the fish finder, which requires the Bottom Dis-
crimination Sounder BBDS1, Network Sounder DFF series or Color LCD Sounder
FCV-1150.
Note: When connecting the FURUNO Color LCD Sounder FCV-1150, do not select
[USER-1] or [USER-2] with the MODE control. The echoes on the TZT display appear
with scan lines.
7.1 How the Fish Finder Operates
The fish finder calculates the distance between its transducer and underwater objects
like fish, lake bottom or seabed. The results are shown in different colors or shades of
gray according to echo strength.
The ultrasonic waves transmitted through water move at a constant speed of approx-
imately 4800 feet (1500 meters) per second. When a sound wave “hits” an underwater
object like fish or sea bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected toward the source.
To find the depth to an object, the fish finder calculates the time difference between
the transmission of a sound wave and the time the reflected sound wave is received.
The picture displayed by the fish finder contains a series of vertical scan lines. Each
line is a "picture" of the objects under the boat. The series of pictures are put side-by-
side across the screen to show the contours of the bottom and echoes from fish. The
amount of history of objects that have moved under the boat can be less than a minute
to more than one minute depending on the picture advance speed.
7.2 How to Select a Display
Your fish finder has six display modes. These modes are single frequency, dual fre-
quency, bottom zoom, bottom lock, A-scope, and bottom discrimination (requires Bot-
tom Discrimination Sounder BBDS1 or Network Fish Finder DFF1-UHD and specified
transducer).
7. FISH FINDER
7-2
7.2.1 Single frequency display
The single frequency display shows either the low-frequency or high-frequency picture
on all the screen. Select a frequency according to your purpose.
A low frequency gives a wide detection area. Use the low frequency for general
search and to find bottom conditions.
A high frequency gives better resolution. Use the high frequency to inspect a school
of fish.
Detection area
How to select a single frequency display
1. Select [Mode] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Single Freq.].
3. Select [Frequency] from the RotoKey menu.
4. Select [HF] (high frequency) or [LF] (low frequency).
You can switch the frequency between high and low by tapping the sounder scale box
at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.
High
frequency
Low
frequency
Low frequency High frequency
For TZTBB, tap the area circumscribed above to switch between high and low frequencies.
Note: You can change the range by tapping the depth (see paragraph 7.4.2).
Sounder scale box
Sounder scale box
Depth
Depth
7. FISH FINDER
7-3
7.2.2 Dual frequency display
The dual frequency display provides both low and high frequency pictures. Use the
dual frequency display to compare the same picture with two different sounding fre-
quencies.
How to select the dual frequency display
Select [Mode] from the RotoKey menu then select [Dual Freq.].
How to reverse the display pictures between low and high frequencies
In the default setting, the low frequency picture is on the left, and the high frequency
is on the right. To reverse the pictures between low and high frequencies, select [Fre-
quency] from the RotoKey menu then select [LF]. The picture for the frequency option
([HF] or [LF]) selected here is displayed on the right.
7.2.3 Zoom displays
Zoom mode expands selected area of the single frequency picture. Two modes are
available: bottom lock and bottom zoom.
How to activate a zoom display
1. Select [Mode] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Btm Lock] or [Btm Zoom].
To quit the zoom display and go to the single frequency display, select [Mode] from
the RotoKey menu then select [Single Freq.].
You can switch the frequency for the zoom displays by tapping the sounder scale box
at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.
Low
frequency
High
frequency
LF HF
156
300
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 2
RADAR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
DAR
D
AR
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA 2
DATA 1
DATA 1
Freq.
(kHz)
Low
High
Beamwidth Resolution
Detection
range
Bottom
tail
Wide
Narrow
Low
High
Deep
Shallow
Long
Short
Bottom lock/Low frequency
Bottom zoom/Low frequency
Bottom lock/High frequency
Bottom zoom/High frequency
For TZTBB, tap the area circumscribed above to switch between high and low frequencies.
Note: You can change the range by tapping the depth (see paragraph 7.4.2).
Sounder scale box
Depth
Depth
Depth
Depth
Sounder scale box
Sounder scale box
Sounder scale box
7. FISH FINDER
7-4
Bottom lock display
The bottom lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half and a
7 to 400 feet (2 to 120 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded on the
left half. This display helps you separate the fish near the bottom from the bottom
echo. You can select the bottom lock range with [Bottom Lock Range Span] in [Sound-
er] of the main menu.
Bottom zoom display
The bottom zoom display expands the bottom and the fish near the bottom according
to the zoom range selected on [Zoom Range Span] in [Sounder] of the main menu.
This display helps you find the density of the bottom. A short echo tail normally indi-
cates a soft bottom (sand bottom, etc.). A long echo tail indicates a hard bottom.
Zoomed
school of fish
Bottom lock display Single freq. display
Zoom marker
School of fish
This area zoomed
and displayed on
left 1/2 of screen.
BL LF
Bottom shown as a straight line
156
300
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
DATA
2
RADAR
RADAR
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
A
A
DATA 1
A
A
Zoom marker
automatically
follows change in
depth.
Bottom zoom display
Bottom
Single freq. display
Zoom marker
BZ LF
156
300
DATA 1
DATA
1
DATA 2
2
2
2
2
2
DATA
2
RADA
DA
DA
A
A
A
A
AR
A
A
A
AR
AR
AR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
DAR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
7. FISH FINDER
7-5
7.2.4 A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display appears at the right of the screen and is available in any fish find-
er mode. This display shows the echoes at each transmission with the amplitudes and
tone in balance with their intensities. This display helps you identify possible fish spe-
cies and bottom structure.
How to show or hide the A-scope display
To show the A-scope display, select [A-scope] from the RotoKey menu. To hide the
A-scope display, deselect [A-scope].
A-scope peak hold
You can show the "normal" A-scope display plus the peak-hold amplitude picture for
the last five seconds in dots.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [A-Scope Peak Hold].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
A-scope display
Fish echo
Single frequency display
"Peak"
shows past
amplitude
with dots.
Strong
reflection
(bottom)
LF
Weak reflection
(small fish or noise)
156
300
DATA 1
DATA
1
DAT
TA 2
DAT
TA
2
RAD
AD
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DAR
A
DAR
DAR
AR
AR
A
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RAD
AD
AD
AD
AD
D
D
D
D
D
DAR
D
D
D
D
D
D
DAR
D
D
D
AR
DA
A
A
A
A
AR
AR
AR
A
AR
AR
AR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
7. FISH FINDER
7-6
7.2.5 Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination display, available with the Bottom Discrimination Sounder
BBDS1 or Network Fish Finder DFF1-UHD and appropriate transducer, identifies
probable bottom composition. The display is available in all screen divisions, single or
dual frequency mode and occupies the bottom 1/6 of the screen in the full screen dis-
play. The illustration below is the example display for the BBDS1.
How to active or deactivate the bottom discrimination display
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Sounder] - [Fish Finder Source] menu.
3. Select [BBDS1] or [DFF1-UHD].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
5. To activate the bottom discrimination display, select [Bottom Type] from the Ro-
toKey menu on the sounder display.
To deactivate the bottom discrimination display, deselect [Bottom Type].
7.3 Automatic Fish Finder Operation
Your fish finder can be adjusted automatically to let you do other tasks.
7.3.1 How the automatic fish finder operates
The automatic fish finder function automatically adjusts the gain, clutter, TVG, echo
offset and range. The main features of the automatic mode are as shown below.
Gain adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver to show the bottom echo in reddish-
brown (default color arrangement).
Clutter automatically reduces low-level noise like plankton.
The TVG function is automatically adjusted.
The echo offset balances the gain on high and low frequencies.
Range is adjusted automatically to show the bottom echo.
Bottom
discrimination
display
Rock Gravel
Sand
Mud
Sand and rock are the most likely bottom type in this example.
LF HF
576
850
DATA 1
DATA 1
DD
D
D
D
D
DA
D
D
D
D
DATA 2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DA
DA
DATA 2
D
R
R
A
R
R
RAD
R
RAD
R
D
R
RADAR
RAD
RAD
RA
R
RAD
RADA
A
AD
D
DAR
DA
DAR
DA
AR
A
A
A
R
A
R
A
R
AR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RAD
R
R
RAD
R
RAD
RA
RAD
RAD
RAD
R
RADA
RADAR
RADA
R
RADA
AD
D
DAR
DAR
DA
DA
A
AR
A
AR
AR
AR
AR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
7. FISH FINDER
7-7
7.3.2 How to select an automatic fish finder mode
There are two types of automatic fish finder modes: [Auto Fishing] and [Auto Cruising].
[Auto Fishing] searches for schools of fish, and [Auto Cruising] tracks the bottom.
[Auto Cruising] uses a higher clutter removal setting than [Auto Fishing]. Do not use
[Auto Cruising] when your purpose is to find fish, because the clutter removal circuit
can erase weak echoes.
To select an automatic fish finder mode:
1. Select [Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Auto Fishing] or [Auto Cruising].
7.4 Manual Fish Finder Operation
Use the manual operation to see schools of fish and the bottom echo with a fixed gain
setting. The gain, range and range shift functions let you select the depth you can see
on the screen.
7.4.1 How to select the manual mode
1. Select [Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [Manual].
7.4.2 How to select the display range
Manual range setting
TZT9/TZT14: Rotate the RotoKey
TM
to select the range. The range can not be
changed in the auto mode or the bottom discrimination display.
TZTBB: Pinch the fish finder screen. Or tap the sounder scale box at the bottom left-
hand corner of the screen to display the slider bar. Drag the circle icon to set the range
scale.
How to turn on or off the auto range
The range can be selected automatically or manually. Select [Auto Range] from the
RotoKey menu for auto range. To turn off the auto range, deselect [Auto Range].
Tap the area circled above to display the
slider bar.
Note: You can switch between low and high
frequencies by tapping the right side of the
sounder scale box (see paragraph 7.2.1).
Drag the circle
icon to set the
range scale.
Slider bar
Increase
the range
300ft
Current
range
156 ft
300 ft
Decrease
the range
7. FISH FINDER
7-8
7.4.3 How to Shift the Range
The basic range and range shift functions let you select the depth you can see on the
screen. This function is not available when [Auto Range] is active.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Select [Range Shift] to open the software keyboard.
4. Set the range then select [Confirm].
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.4.4 How to adjust the gain
The gain controls how echoes of different strengths are displayed. Set the gain to
show a slight amount of noise on the screen. Increase the gain for greater depths and
lower the gain for shallow waters.
Note: This function is not available in the auto mode.
1. Select [Adjust] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select [HF Gain] or [LF Gain].
3. Drag the circle icon to set the gain (see the figure below).
7.4.5 How to reduce the clutter
Low intensity “spots” of noise appear over most of the screen like in the illustration
shown below. These spots are caused by sediment in the water or noise. You can re-
duce this type of noise.
Note: This function is not available in the auto mode.
Gain too high
Gain proper
Gain too low
0
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
Drag the circle icon
to set the gain.
7. FISH FINDER
7-9
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Drag the circle icon in [Clutter] to set the level. The larger the setting value, the
greater the degree of reduction.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.5 Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed controls how quickly the vertical scan lines move across
the screen. A fast advance speed expands the size of a school of fish horizontally on
the screen. A slow advance speed shortens the school of fish. Use a fast advance
speed to see the hard bottom. Use a slow advance speed to see the smooth bottom.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Select [Picture Advance] menu.
4. Select a picture advance speed. The options in the window indicate the number
of scan lines made per transmission. For example, [1/2] creates one scan line per
two transmissions. [1/16] is the slowest advance speed and [4/1] is the fastest
speed. [Stop] stops picture advance, and is useful for taking a photo or screenshot
of the screen.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.6 How to Reduce Interference
Interference from other fish finders and electrical equipment appears on the screen as
shown in the illustration. When these types of interference appear on the screen, use
Fast
Slow
CAUTION
The picture is not refreshed when
picture advancement is stopped.
Maneuvering the vessel in this condition
may result in a dangerous situation.
7. FISH FINDER
7-10
the interference rejector to reduce the interference. Turn off the interference rejector
when there is no interference, so that you do not erase weak echoes.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Select [Interference Rejection].
4. Select [Low], [Medium], [High] or [Auto]. [High] is the greatest interference rejec-
tion. [Auto] automatically selects suitable interference setting.
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
To deactivate the interference rejection, select [Off] at step 5.
7.7 How to Measure Range, Depth or Time to an Ob-
ject
You can measure the depth to an object with the VRM. Also, you can measure the
range and time from the right edge to a location. For example, you can measure how
many minutes ago an echo appeared.
To measure the range, the depth or the time to an object, select an object to display
the VRM. Read the range, the depth and the time in the box.
When you want to see the past echoes which are off the screen, drag the screen to
right. To show the current display, select [Cancel Hist.] at the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
Interference from
other sounder
Interference from
electrical equipment
VRM
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
ADAR
R
R
ADAR
R
AR
A
DA
D
AD
RA
A
R
RADAR
ADAR
R
ADAR
R
AR
A
DA
D
AD
RA
A
R
DATA 2
2
A
A
TA
T
AT
AT
DA
D
D
D
D
D
DATA
2
DATA 2
2
A
A
TA
T
AT
AT
DA
D
D
D
D
D
D
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
DATA 1
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DATA
1
DATA 1
DATA 1
A
D
D
D
D
D
New Point
Auto Ra
Go To
Frequency
Mode
Adjust
Range
Depth
Time
299 yd
292 ft
1'46s
7. FISH FINDER
7-11
7.8 How to Balance Echo Strength
A school of fish at a depth deeper than a school of equal strength in shallow water ap-
pears in weaker colors. This condition is caused by the attenuation of the ultrasonic
wave. To display the schools of fish in the same colors, use the TVG. The TVG auto-
matically increases the gain with depth so that echoes of the same strength and dif-
ferent depths are shown in the same colors. In the illustration shown below, for
example, the TVG is set for 300 ft and the TVG level is adjusted. Unnecessary echoes
at a distance less than 300 ft are deleted and echoes at depths greater than 300 ft are
not adjusted.
Note: This function is not available in the auto mode.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Drag the circle icon in [TVG HF] (high frequency) or [TVG LF] (low frequency) to
set the level. Raise the TVG to increase the gain difference between near and far
distances.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.9 Fish Finder Alarms
Two types of fish alarms release audio and visual alarms to tell you that echoes from
fish are in the area you selected. These alarms are [Fish Alarm] and [Fish Alarm for
Bottom Lock].
The [Fish Alarm] function tells you when an echo above some strength (selectable) is
within the alarm range you specify.
The [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock] function tells you when fish are within some distance
from the bottom. The bottom lock display must be active to use this alarm.
7.9.1 How to set an alarm
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
Unwanted echoes
Unwanted echoes
are erased.
Echoes of the same size
are displayed in different
sizes and colors
depending on depth.
Echoes of the same size
are displayed in same
sizes and colors.
0 ft
300 ft
300 ft
0 ft
7. FISH FINDER
7-12
3. For fish alarm, select [Range Minimum Value] or [Range Maximum Value] below
[Fish Alarm] to display the software keyboard.
For bottom lock fish alarm, select [Range Minimum Value] or [Range Maximum
Value] below [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the start depth in [Range Minimum Value], the end depth in [Range Maximum
Value].
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.9.2 How to activate or deactivate an alarm
Fish alarm
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. To activate the fish alarm, select the [ON] icon in [Fish Alarm].
To deactivate the fish alarm, select the [OFF] icon in [Fish Alarm].
You can activate or deactivate [Fish Alarm] from the RotoKey menu.
Bottom lock fIsh alarm
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. To activate the bottom lock fish alarm, select the [ON] icon in [Fish Alarm for Bot-
tom Lock].
To deactivate the fish alarm, select the [OFF] icon in [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock].
[Range Minimum
Value]
(from sea
surface)
[Range Maximum
Value]
(from sea
surface)
[Range
Maximum Value]
(from bottom)
[Range Minimum
Value]
(from bottom)
Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock
Alarm Range
Fish Alarm
Surface
Bottom
Alarm
Range
Alarm
Range
A
larm
R
Fish
7. FISH FINDER
7-13
7.9.3 Alarm sensitivity
You can select which strength of echoes release the fish alarms.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder] - [Fish Alarm Level].
3. Select which echo strength releases the fish and bottom lock alarms.
[Low]: Light-blue or stronger echoes
[Medium]: Yellow or stronger echoes
[High]: Red and reddish-brown echoes
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.10 ACCU-FISH
TM
The ACCU-FISH
TM
feature estimates the length of each fish and shows a fish symbol
and depth value or fish length. This feature requires appropriate transducer and either
Network Sounder BBDS1 or DFF series.
Application consideration
The information given by this feature is intended for reference only.
• ACCU-FISH
TM
uses both low and high frequency echoes for the measurements re-
gardless of the frequency mode in use.
The intensity of an echo depends on fish species. If the indicated length is different
from the true length, you can apply an offset in the [Sounder] - [ACCU-Fish Size
Correction] menu of the main menu.
50 kHz and 200 kHz beams are transmitted alternately without reference to the cur-
rent display mode.
To reduce the error, the detection area must be 2 to 100 meters from the surface.
The signal attenuation on the inside-hull transducer is different between 50 kHz and
200 kHz. This attenuation causes some fish to get ignored and the fish length indi-
cated can be shorter than the true length.
Echoes from a school of fish can be in more than one layer, which can cause wrong
length indication.
The fish symbol indication is not shown when the bottom echo does not appear on
the screen.
Low
Medium
High
Fish Alarm Level
Medium
7. FISH FINDER
7-14
7.10.1 How to set ACCU-FISH
TM
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Select [ACCU-Fish Info].
4. Select [Depth] or [Fish Size].
5. Select [ACCU-Fish Symbols].
6. Select [Solid], [Striped] or [Off] (turn off fish symbol).
7. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Fish size Solid Striped
Large fish symbol (more than 51 cm (20.08 inch))
Small fish symbol (10 to 50 cm (3.9. to 19.69 inch))
Depth
Fish Size
ACCU-Fish Info
Depth
Off
Solid
Striped
ACCU-Fish Symbols
Solid
Depth (or Fish Size)
Solid
(small)
237 ft154 ft 237 ft154 ft
Solid
(large)
Striped
(small)
Striped
(large)
7. FISH FINDER
7-15
7.10.2 Fish size correction
The fish size shown on the screen can be different from the true size. If the size is
wrong, add an offset to the measured value to get a more accurate indication on the
screen.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Sounder].
3. Drag the circle icon in [ACCU-Fish Size Correction] to set correction percentage
(setting range: -80% to 100%).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
7.10.3 How to turn the fish symbol indication on
Select [Accu Fish] from the RotoKey menu. Fish symbols and their depth values or
fish lengths appear on the screen. If you selected [Off] at step 7 in paragraph 7.10.1,
the fish symbols are hidden and only the depth values or fish lengths appear.
7.10.4 How to display the fish information
Select a fish symbol (only in ACCU-FISH
TM
mode) to
display the information (size, depth, bearing and
range) about a fish.
7.11 How to Put a Point, Go To a Point or a Position
You can put a point on the sounder display. The point also appears on the chart plotter
display. You can set a point or a position as a go to point.
How to put a point
1. Select a fish symbol (only in ACCU-FISH
TM
mode), a position, etc. to put a point.
2. Select [New Point] from the pop-up menu. The [Creating Point] window appears
(see paragraph 4.2.2).
Setting Revised size
+100 Two times
+50 1.5 times
-50 1/2
-65 1/3
-75 1/4
-80 1/5
66.5 ft
Fish Size
Depth
Bearing
Range
0.3 ft
66.5 ft
166.9
°
M
245 yd
7. FISH FINDER
7-16
3. Select a mark. In the example below, a shrimp mark is put on the fish symbol.
How to go to a point or a position
1. Select a fish symbol (only in ACCU-FISH
TM
mode), a point or a position to display
the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Go To]. The selected symbol*, point* or position is highlighted on the chart
plotter display. For details, see section 4.10.
*: When [Accu Fish] or [Points] is turned on in the [Overlay] RotoKey menu.
7.12 Fish Finder Menu Operation
This section describes the fish finder functions not described in previous sections. To
open the following menus, select [Menu] on the menu icon bar then select [Sounder].
[Day Background Color]: Select the background color for use during daylight hours.
The options are [White], [Light Blue], [Black] and [Dark Blue].
[Night Background Color]: Select the background color for use at nighttime. The op-
tions are [Black] and [Dark Blue].
[Echo Color Levels]: Select the number of colors shown on the screen. The selections
are [8 Colors], [16 Colors] and [64 Colors].
[Zoom Reference Lines]: Show or hide the zoom marker, which appears in the bottom
lock and bottom zoom modes.
294 ft
XXXXX
Fish Finder Source
Day Background Color
Night Background Color
Echo Color Levels
A-Scope Peak Hold
Zoom Reference Lines
High Resolution
Picture Advance
Range Shift
0.0 ft
Bottom Range Shift Area
Zoom Range Span
Bottom Lock Range Span
64 Colors
1/1
30.0 ft
30.0 ft
75
ACCU-Fish Info
ACCU-Fish Symbols
ACCU-Fish Size Correction
Heaving Correction
Interference Rejection
Clutter
TVG HF
TVG LF
Transmit Rate Auto
Transmit Rate Manual
Sounder Transmit
Depth
Solid
0
Auto
0
5
5
21
7. FISH FINDER
7-17
[High Resolution]: When you select [OFF], smoothed echoes are displayed, however,
the screen resolution is lower. To get higher screen resolution and greater detail, se-
lect [ON].
[Bottom Range Shift Area]: Select the area where to show the bottom echo, when [Au-
to Range] is active. For example, setting 75% would place the bottom echo at a posi-
tion equivalent to 75% from the top of the screen.
[Heaving Correction]: When the ship is in rough seas, the bottom echo and the echoes
from fish are not stable, because the distance to the bottom changes. To remove this
problem, the satellite compass sends pitch and roll data to the fish finder to adjust the
TX and RX beams. This function requires a FURUNO Satellite Compass.
[Transmit Rate Auto]: Automatically set the transmit rate according to ship’s speed,
and is inoperative when there is no speed data.
[Transmit Rate Manual]: Change the TX pulse repetition rate in 21 levels (21 is highest
power.). Use 20 in normal use. Lower the TX rate in shallow waters to prevent the sec-
ond reflection echo.
[Sounder Transmit]: Turn on or off the sounder transmission.
[Zero Line Rejection]: Turn the zero line (transmission line) on or off. When turned on,
the transmission line disappears, which allows you to better watch fish echoes near
the surface. The length of the transmission line changes with transducer used and in-
stallation characteristics. If the width of the transmission line is 2.0 or more, set the
transmission line width with [Zero Line Range], as shown on the next page.
Zero line Rejection
Zero line Range
Transducer Draft
Salt Water
Fish Finder Source
Transducer Setup
Transmission Power
External KP
Bottom Level HF
3.0 ft
Bottom Level LF
Gain Offset HF
Gain Offset LF
XXXXX
2.0
Auto Gain Offset HF
Auto Gain Offset LF
STC HF
STC LF
Frequency Adjust HF
Frequency Adjust LF
TX Pulse HF
TX Pulse LF
RX Band HF
RX Band LF
Temperature Port
Std
10
Sounder Initial Setup
Setup
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Std
Std
Std
Std
Sounder Demo Mode
Hardware Factory Default
Off
Reset
Reset Default Settings
Reset
7. FISH FINDER
7-18
[Zero Line Range]: This feature adjusts the transmission line so that the line disap-
pears when [Zero Line Rejection] is turned on. The effective range is 1.4 to 2.5. For a
long tail, increase the value. If the transmission line does not disappear, lower the TX
power (DFF3 only).
[Transducer Draft]: Set the distance between the transducer and the draft line to show
the distance from the sea surface (Setting range: 0.0 to 99.9 ft).
[Salt Water]: Select [ON] to use this equipment in salt water.
[Fish Finder Source]: Select the sounder used, among DFF1, BBDS1, DFF3, FCV-
1150 or DFF1-UHD.
[Transducer Setup]: Select the method to setup the transducer, manually or by select-
ing the model number.
[Manual]: Enter high/low frequencies and TX power.
[Model Number]: Select the type of the transducer connected.
[Transmission Power]: Interference can appear on the screen when the fish finder on
your ship and another ship have the same TX frequency. To prevent this interference,
lower your TX power and ask the other ship to lower their TX power. The setting range
is 0 to10. 0 is off and 10 provides the highest TX power.
[External KP]: Turn on to sync with external keying pulse.
[Bottom Level HF (LF)]: The default bottom level setting (0) determines that two strong
echoes received in sequence are bottom echoes. If the depth indication is not stable
in the default setting, adjust the bottom level here. If vertical lines appear from the bot-
tom echo in the bottom lock display, lower the bottom level to erase the vertical lines.
If you can not identify the fish near the bottom from the bottom echo, increase the bot-
tom level.
[Gain Offset HF (LF)]: If the gain setting is wrong, or there is a difference in the gain
between the low and high frequencies, you can balance the gain for the two frequen-
cies here.
[Auto Gain Offset HF (LF)]: If the auto gain offset is wrong, or there is a difference in
the gain between the low and high frequencies, set an offset here to balance auto gain
for the two frequencies.
[STC HF (LF)]: Delete unnecessary echoes (plankton, air bubbles, etc.) near the sur-
face that hide the fish near the surface. The setting range is 0 to 10, and 0 is off. 10
deletes unnecessary echoes from the surface to approximately 16 ft. Make sure you
do not use more STC than necessary, because you can erase the small echoes near
the surface (DFF3 only).
[Frequency Adjust HF (LF)]: You can adjust the TX frequency of both the low- and
high-frequency transducers. Use this feature when your fish finder and another fish
finder operate on the same frequency, causing interference. Change the frequency of
your transducer by enough percentage points to remove the interference (DFF3 only).
[TX Pulse HF (LF)]: The pulse length is automatically set according to range and shift.
Use a short pulse for better resolution and a long pulse when detection range is im-
portant. To improve resolution on zoom displays, use [Short 1] or [Short 2]. [Short 1]
improves the detection resolution, but the detection range is shorter than with [Std]
(pulse length is 1/4 of [Std]). [Short 2] raises the detection resolution, however detec-
tion range is shorter (pulse length is about 1/2 of [Std]) than [Std]. [Std] is the standard
7. FISH FINDER
7-19
pulse length, and is suitable for general use. [Long] increases the detection range but
lowers the resolution (about 1/2 compared to the [Std] pulse length) (DFF3 only).
[RX Band HF (LF)]: The RX bandwidth is automatically set according to pulse length.
To decrease noise, select [Narrow]. For better resolution, select [Wide] (DFF3 only).
[Temperature Port]: Select the data source for water temperature (DFF3 only).
[MJ]: The water temperature data from the water temperature/speed sensor
[Low Frequency]: The low frequency measured water temperature
[High Frequency]: The high frequency measured water temperature
[Sounder Demo Mode]: The demonstration mode provides, with connection of the
transducer, simulated operation of the equipment, using internally generated echoes.
[Off]: Turn demo mode off.
[Shallow]: Shallow depth demonstration
[Deep]: Deep depth demonstration
[Hardware Factory Default]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
unit selected in [Fish Finder Source]. Not available with FCV-1150.
[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Sounder] menu.
7.13 LCD Color Sounder FCV-1150 and NavNet
TZtouch
The FCV-1150 can be connected to your NavNet TZtouch, and some functions can
be controlled from the NavNet TZtouch. The table below shows those features that
can be controlled from the NavNet TZtouch. This feature is available with the FCV-
1150 software version 0252359-03.01 or higher.
Function
Controllable
from NavNet
Remarks
A-scope Yes
ACCU-FISH
TM
Yes
Auto gain offset No Set at FCV-1150.
Background color Yes
Bottom detection level Yes
Bottom lock range Yes
Bottom shift range No Set at FCV-1150.
Clutter No Set at FCV-1150.
Color erase Yes
Depth unit Yes
Draft No
Fish alarm Yes
Fish info Yes
Fish info size Yes
Fish level Yes
Fish size correction Yes
Fish symbol Yes
Frequency adjustment Yes
Gain Yes According to Gain/Mode setting at FCV-1150.
7. FISH FINDER
7-20
Gain offset No Set at FCV-1150.
Heaving Yes
High resolution Yes
Interference rejection Yes
Manual pulse length Yes
Mode Yes According to Gain/Mode setting at FCV-1150.
NavNet does not have Auto Shift.
No. of echo colors Yes
Picture advance Yes
RX band Yes
Shift Yes
Speed of sound No Set at FCV-1150.
Split range Yes
TX line display, TX line area No
TX power On/Off only.
TX pulse length Yes
TX rate Yes
Water temp. graph Yes
White marker Yes
Zoom marker Yes
Zoom mode Yes
Zoom range Yes
Function
Controllable
from NavNet
Remarks
7. FISH FINDER
7-21
7.14 Interpreting the Display
Zero line
The zero line (transmission line) shows the position of the transducer. The line disap-
pears from the screen when the range is shifted.
Bottom echoes
The strongest echoes are from the bottom, and are normally shown in reddish-brown
or red. The colors and the width change with bottom material, depth, sea condition,
installation, frequency, pulse length and sensitivity.
Bottom contour
The tail from a hard bottom is longer than the tail from a soft bottom, because the hard
bottom reflects more of the ultrasonic pulse. An echo from shallow water gives a stron-
ger reflection than the echo received from deep water. A longer bottom tail appears
on slopes, because of the difference in travel time at both edges of the beam angle.
For the rough bottom, echoes are reflected on many different planes, which displays
echoes in many layers, giving a 3D effect.
Zero
line
Range shifted
Second
bottom echo
Difference in sensitivity
Difference in depth
Soft bottom
Hard bottom
Rough bottom
7. FISH FINDER
7-22
Nature of a bottom
The nature of a bottom is known from the intensity
and length of the bottom tail. To find the nature of
a bottom, use a long pulse length and normal gain.
For the hard and rough bottom, the bottom echo is
reddish-brown with a long tail. For the mud or sand
bottom, the bottom echo has less red and with a
short tail. A bottom with a lot of small particles can
give a long tail on the low frequency picture.
Fish quantity
The size and density of a school of fish are indi-
cators of the quantity of fish.
Size of a school of fish
Usually the size of fish echoes on the screen is proportional to the actual size of the
school of fish. However, if two fish echoes appear at different depths with the same
size, the school of fish at the shallower depth is larger because the ultrasonic beam
widens as it propagates and a school of fish in deep water is displayed larger.
Rock base
Mud & sand
Large school
Large school
Small school
Small school
Size of school of fish
Sounding time for a deep school of fish
p
school
o
e for a deep
e
f
or
S
g
S
oundin
g
tim
e
Sounding time for a shallow school of fish
Sounding time for a shallow school of fish
School depth and sounding time
7. FISH FINDER
7-23
Density of a school of fish
If two schools appear with the same color at different depths, the one in deeper water
is denser because the ultrasonic wave attenuates as it propagates and the school of
fish in deep water tends to be displayed in a weaker color.
Bottom fish
The echoes from the bottom are stronger than the
bottom fish echoes so that you can distinguish be-
tween them by colors. The bottom echoes are
normally shown in reddish-brown or red, the bot-
tom fish echoes in weaker color.
Plankton
A plankton layer appears as a large amount of
green or blue dots, and is a possible location for
fish. A plankton layer moves down in the day and
up at night.
Current rip
When two ocean currents of different speeds di-
rections and water temperatures meet, a current
rip occurs. A current rip appears on the screen as
shown in the right illustration.
Fish echo
Weak echo
Less reddish
(Sparse echo)
Reddish
(Dense echo)
a
k
ec
h
o
o
Strong echo
Difference in signal strength
Bottom fish echo
Plankton
School of fish
Current rip
7. FISH FINDER
7-24
Surface noise
When the sea is rough or the ship moves over a
wake, surface noise can appear at the top of the
screen.
Air bubbles in the water
When the sea is rough or the ship makes a quick
turn, there can be blank spots in the bottom echo
(see the right illustration). These blank spots are
caused by air bubbles which stop the movement
of the sound wave. These air bubbles can occur
with the low frequency ultrasonic waves.
Unstable bottom echo
The bottom echoes can have a saw-tooth ap-
pearance. This occurs in heavy weather be-
cause pitching and rolling changes the direction
of the ultrasonic pulses and the vertical motion of
the ship causes the distance to the bottom to
change.
False echo
When an ultrasonic pulse is transmitted, some energy leaves from each side of the
beam. This energy has the name “sidelobe”. Echoes from sidelobes show on the
screen as false images like in the illustration shown below.
Surface noise
Ultrasonic wave
blocked by air bubbles
Unstable bottom echo
Mainlobe
Mainlobe
Sidelobe
Sidelobe
False image
8-1
8. FILE OPERATIONS
This chapter covers the file operations shown below, using SD cards.
How to export points, routes and tracks
How to import points, routes and tracks
Note 1: DO NOT remove the card while the SD drive is being accessed, to prevent
loss of data or damage to the card.
Note 2: User setup items cannot be imported or exported between TZT9, TZT14 and
TZTBB.
8.1 How to Format SD Cards
You do not need to format SD cards for use with the system. However, if you need to
format a card to delete all data from the card, see section 1.5 "SD Cards".
8.2 Files Menu Operation
The [Files] menu of the main
menu is where you import
and export data.
TZD
Export File Format
Import/Export
Import
Import Points & Routes
Export All Points & Routes
Import Tracks
Export Tracks
Export
Export
Import
Backup/Restore Settings
BackUp Settings
Restore Settings
Restore
Backup
Clone SD-Card
Clean Points, Routes & Tracks
Clean all
Clone
NN3D Import/Export
Import from NN3D
Export to NN3D
Export
Import
8. FILE OPERATIONS
8-2
[Export File Format]: Select the file format to use to export data, among [TZD], [CSV],
[GPX] or [KML].
[Import Points & Routes]: Import points and routes from an SD card. When you import
points and routes from an SD card, all points and routes currently stored in the TZT
unit are replaced with those on the SD card.
[Export All Points & Routes]: This unit holds 30,000 points and 200 routes in its internal
memory. When the capacity for points or routes is reached, a new point or route can-
not be entered unless an unnecessary point or route is erased. For those reasons, you
may want to export all points and routes to an SD card.
[Import Tracks]: Import tracks from an SD card. When you import tracks from an SD
card, all tracks currently stored in the TZT unit are replaced with those on the SD card.
[Export Tracks]: This unit holds 30,000 tracks in its internal memory. When the capac-
ity for tracks is reached, a new track cannot be entered unless an unnecessary track
is erased. For those reasons, you may want to export all tracks to an SD card.
[Import from NN3D]: Import points and routes from NN3D.
[Export to NN3D]: Export points and routes to NN3D.
[BackUp Settings]: Backup the settings to an SD card. This feature helps you set an-
other multi-function display with the same settings on the SD card.
[Restore Settings]: Load the saved settings from an SD card to this unit.
[Clone SD-Card]: Copy the data between SD cards.
[Clean Points, Routes & Tracks]: Delete all points, routes and tracks currently stored
in the TZT unit.
8.3 File Format
You can select the file format to use to export data.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Files] - [Export File Format] menu.
3. Select [TZD], [CSV], [GPX] or [KML].
[TZD]: For TZT series
[CSV]: For use with NavNet 3D series
[GPX]: For use with PC plotter
[KML]: For use with PC plotter
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
TZD
CSV
GPX
KML
Export File Format
TZD
8. FILE OPERATIONS
8-3
8.4 How to Export Points and Routes
When the capacity for point is reached, the oldest point is erased to clear space for
new point. A new route cannot be entered when the memory for routes is full. If you
need to save points and routes permanently, save them to an SD card.
1. Put a blank formatted SD card in the right card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Export All Points & Routes].
5. Select [SD-Right].
6. After the equipment has exported the data, select [Close] to exit the menu.
8.5 How to Import Points and Routes
You can import points and routes to the internal memory of a TZT unit. Use this feature
to use the same data across the TZT network.
1. Put the correct SD card in either card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Import Points & Routes].
5. Select [SD-Right] or [SD-Left].
6. Select the data to import then select [OK].
7. After the equipment has imported the selected data, select [Close] to exit the
menu.
Export All Points & Routes
Cancel
SD-RightSD-Left
Import Points & Routes
SD-Right
OK Cancel
SD-Left
ABCDEFG
8. FILE OPERATIONS
8-4
8.6 How to Import or Export Tracks
How to import tracks
You can import tracks to the internal memory of a TZT unit.
1. Put the correct SD card in either card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Import Tracks].
5. Select [SD-Right] or [SD-Left].
6. Select the data to import then select [OK].
7. After the equipment has imported the selected data, select [Close] to exit the
menu.
How to export tracks
You can export tracks to an SD card.
1. Put a blank formatted SD card in the right card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Export Tracks].
5. Select [SD-Right].
6. After the equipment has exported the data, select [Close] to exit the menu.
Import Tracks
SD-Right
OK Cancel
SD-Left
ABCDEFG
Export Tracks
Cancel
SD-RightSD-Left
8. FILE OPERATIONS
8-5
8.7 How to Backup the Equipment Settings
You can save the settings to an SD card to use the settings on other TZT units.
1. Put a blank formatted SD card in the right card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [BackUp Settings].
5. Select [SD-Right].
6. After the equipment has exported the settings, select [Close] to exit the menu.
8.8 How to Load the Equipment Settings
You can load the saved settings in an SD card to this unit.
1. Put the correct SD card in either card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Restore Settings].
5. Select [SD-Right] or [SD-Left].
6. Select the settings to load then select [OK].
7. After the equipment has loaded the settings, select [Close] to exit the menu.
Cancel
SD-RightSD-Left
Backup Settings
Restore Settings
SD-Right
OK Cancel
SD-Left
AAAAAAA
8. FILE OPERATIONS
8-6
8.9 How to Copy the Equipment Settings
You can copy the data between SD cards.
1. Put the source SD card in the left card drive and the copy destination SD card in
the right card drive.
2. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
3. Select [Files].
4. Select [Clone SD-Card].
5. Select [Start Clone].
6. After the equipment has copied the data, select [Close] to exit the menu.
8.10 How to Delete Points, Routes and Tracks
You can delete all points, routes and tracks currently stored in a TZT unit.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Files].
3. Select [Clean Points, Routes & Tracks].
4. Select [Yes].
5. After the equipment has deleted the data, select [Close] to exit the menu.
Clone SD-Card
SD Card Left
Ready
SD Card Right
Ready
You must insert All SD-Cards
Cancel
Start Clone
Are you sure you want to delete all points, routes & tracks? Important : all Navnet
TZT have to be connected for this operation.
Yes
No
9-1
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
The camera/video function allows you to use your unit to play back images from a vid-
eo player, on-board camera, network camera or DVD player. Network camera images
can be seen across the TZT network. A video signal can be seen only on the TZT that
receives the video signal.
You can also set the video application to show the display of each video in turns. Fur-
ther, you can also adjust the brightness, contrast and color of each image.
FUSION-Link allows compatible TZT displays to interface and
achieve control of specialized FUSION marine entertainment
equipment.
9.1 How to Display a Video Image
The camera application is included in the default display selection window. Press the
Home key (or tap the Home icon) to show the display selection window. Select the
camera display to validate your selection.
9.2 Video Signal Type
There are four types of video signals connected to this equipment.
Analog: Images from a video player, on-board camera or DVD player
Digital (IP): Images from a network camera
Axis Server 241Q: Images from an axis server 241Q. Available quad mode (Four
images are displayed simultaneously).
FLIR: Images from an infrared camera
Camera
display
See
section
9.7.
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-2
9.3 How to Set the Video Display
9.3.1 How to select the input source
Select the input source from the RotoKey menu (see section 9.6).
[Analog 1 (2)]: An analog signal
[IP 1 (2, 3, 4)]: A digital signal
[Quad]: All digital signals (maximum of four) from an axis server 241Q
[Input 1 (2, 3, 4)]: A digital signal from an axis server 241Q
[Quad 2]: All digital signals (maximum of four) from second axis server 241Q
[Input 1 (2, 3, 4)]: A digital signal from second axis server 241Q
Note: The default menu names are replaced with the nicknames set in the [Camera]
menu. See paragraph 9.3.2.
9.3.2 How to set each video signal
Analog camera
You can select video format for an analog camera and change its nickname. Select
[Camera] - [Analog Camera 1] (or 2) of the main menu.
[Video Format]: Select the video format from [PAL] or [NTSC].
Note: The power must be reset to apply the setting. After you change the setting, the
following message appears.
Select [Yes] to reset the power and apply the setting immediately, or select [No] to ap-
ply the setting at the next power on. The menu shows the new setting ([PAL] or
[NTSC]) but change is not effected until the power is reset.
[NickName]: Enter (or change) the nickname (a maximum of 13 alphanumeric charac-
ters) with the software keyboard then select [Confirm].
Analog Camera 1
Camera 1
Video Format NTSC
NickName
PAL
NTSC
Video Format
NTSC
Application have to restart now
!
Do you want to restart application
?
Yes
No
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-3
IP camera
You can change the nickname and IP address for an IP camera. Also, you can turn on
or off the PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) function. Select [Camera] - [IP Camera 1] (or 2, 3, 4) of
the main menu.
[NickName]: Enter (or change) the nickname (a maximum of 13 alphanumeric charac-
ters) with the software keyboard then select [Confirm].
[IP Camera]: Enter the IP address with the software keyboard then select [Confirm].
[PTZ Control]: Select the [ON] icon to turn on the PTZ function.
Axis Server 241Q
The axis server digitizes four analog video sources (IP cameras) and makes them
available on the network. Two axis servers are available: [Axis Server 241Q] and [Sec-
ond Axis Server 241Q]. Select [Camera] - [Axis Server 241Q] of the main menu.
[Server 241Q]: Select the [ON] icon to receive the signal from an axis server 241Q.
[IP Server]: Enter the IP address with the software keyboard then select [Confirm].
[Quad Mode]: Select the [ON] icon to display the four images from an axis server 241Q
simultaneously.
[Input 1] (or 2, 3, 4): Select the [ON] icon to receive each signal from an axis server
241Q.
[NickName Input 1] (or 2, 3, 4): Enter (or change) the nickname (a maximum of 13 al-
phanumeric characters) with the software keyboard then select [Confirm].
IP Camera 1
NickName IP Camera 1
PTZ Control
IP Camera
172.31.200.3
Axis Server 241Q
Server 241Q
Quad Mode
IP Server
172.31.200.7
Input 1
NickName Input 1
Video 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
When selecting the
[ON] icon in [Input 1],
this menu item appears.
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-4
FLIR camera
Images from an infrared camera allow you to navigate easily at night or in bad weath-
er. Select [Camera] - [FLIR Installation] of the main menu.
[Scan IP]: Select the [Scan] icon to scan the IP address automatically when connect-
ing the FLIR camera.
[FLIR IP]: Enter the IP address manually with the software keyboard then select [Con-
firm].
[Video Source]: Select the input source for the FLIR.
[Camera Offset (Right-left)]: Adjust the side position of the FLIR camera.
[Camera Offset (Up-Down)]: Adjust the up-and down position of the FLIR camera.
[Automatic Zoom]: Select the [ON] icon to turn on the automatic zoom.
[Zoom Distance]: Set the distance to zoom automatically.
[Camera Altitude]: Set the altitude for the FLIR camera.
[Automatic Lock On Active Waypoint]: Select the [ON] icon to automatically track the
point currently set as a go to point.
[Automatic Lock ON MOB]: Select the [ON] icon to automatically track the MOB posi-
tion.
9.3.3 How to adjust the image size
You can adjust the image size.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
FLIR Installation
Scan IP
VIdeo Source
FLIR IP
255.255.255.255
Camera Offset (Right-left)
Camera Offset (Up-Down)
Automatic Zoom
Zoom Distance
Camera Altitude
Automatic Lock On Active Waypoint
Automatic Lock On MOB
Scan
NickName Camera 1
+0.0 º
+0.0 º
300 ft
300 ft
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-5
2. Select the [Camera] - [Video Display] menu.
3. Select [Stretch] or [Fit].
[Stretch]: Shrink or enlarge the image to fit the monitor’s width.
[Fit]: Shrink or enlarge the image to fit the monitor’s height. The aspect ratio is
kept, so a black bar appears on the right and left sides of the picture, but this is
normal.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
9.3.4 How to cycle your video inputs
You can browse all the images that you receive. Use this feature to monitor the area
around your ship, engine room, etc. with an on-board camera.
1. Select [Cycle Config.] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select a menu item of an image which you want to display.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select all menu items which you want to display.
4. Select [Cycle] from the RotoKey menu.
Note: If you tap the screen during the cycling of the video inputs, the cycling restarts
after one minute.
9.3.5 How to set the dwell time
You can set the amount of time to show each video input before switching to the next.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [Camera Dwell Time] menu.
3. Select a dwell time.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Stretch
Fit
Video Display
Stretch
0’05s
0’10s
0’15s
Camera Dwell Time
0’05s
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-6
9.4 Pop-up Menus by the FLIR Camera
[Camera FoV] menu
You can display the field of view by the FLIR camera on the plotter display.
1. Select the boat icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select [Camera FoV]. The circular sector in translucent red appears on the
screen.
[Move Camera] and [Lock Camera] menus
You can rotate the FLIR camera about the position you select (touch) on the plotter or
radar display. Select [Lock Camera] from the RotoKey menu. To track the position, se-
lect [Move Camera] from the RotoKey menu.
9.5 How to Adjust the Video Image
1. Select [Contrast] or [Brightness] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Drag the circle icon to adjust the setting (see the figure below).
Note: This menu is not available when [Cycle] is on (see paragraph 9.3.4).
Drag the circle icon
to adjust the setting.
50
RADAR
RADAR
DATA 2
DATA
2
DATA 1
DATA
1
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-7
9.6 Touch Control on the Camera Display
Analog and Axis Server 241Q
FLIR
Operation Function
Tap Short tap: During zoom
mode, center the position
tapped.
Long tap (TZTBB only):
Opens the RotoKey menu.
Drag Scroll the camera image to
the dragged direction.
Pinch Zoom in or out the camera
image.
Operation Function
Tap Short tap: During zoom
mode, center the position
tapped.
Long tap (TZTBB only):
Opens the RotoKey menu.
Zoom in
Zoom out
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-8
9.7 FUSION-Link
FUSION-Link allows compatible TZT displays to interface and achieve control of spe-
cialized FUSION marine entertainment equipment.
How to access the FUSION screen and controls
The FUSION controls can be accessed in three methods:
FUSION icon (full screen),
RotoKey menu (minimized screen), and
• Function Gesture.
Method 1
: FUSION icon (for full window)
Select the [FUSION] icon on the menu icon bar.
Example1: iPod in the full screen
Drag the
circle icon
to set the
volume.
Tap to open
or close
[Zones].
Tap to open
or close
[Menu].
Play or pause.
Tap: Goto previous number.
Holding down: Rewind while holding down.
Mute or unmute.
Turn down volume.
Turn up volume.
Select
[Close] to
exit this
window.
Tap: Goto next number.
Holding down: Fast forward while holding down.
Drag to
change
media
mode.
Tap to open or
close [Tone].
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-9
Example2: VHF in the full screen
Note: For details, see the manual for the FUSION-Link equipment.
Method 2
: RotoKey menu (for minimized window)
Select [Fusion Ctrl] from the RotoKey menu to display the audio control bar on each
display. The following is the example on the chart plotter.
Drag the
circle icon
to adjust
squelch.
Tap: Switch channel selection mode between
preset and manual.
Long tap: After selecting channel in manual mode,
long tap to register the channel as preset channel.
Mute or unmute.
Turn down volume.
Turn up volume.
Select channel.
Tap to
select
CH16.
Channel
selection
mode
Tap to
go to
FUSION
screen
(full
window).
Tap to
turn off
the bar.
For iPod
For VHF
9. CAMERA/VIDEO/FUSION-Link
9-10
Method 3: Tap two fingers on the screen
Preset [Function Gesture] for [Fusion] (for full window) or [Fusion Ctrl] (for minimized
window) (see section 1.14). Once you have done this preset, simply tap the screen
with two fingers to access the FUSION controls.
10-1
10. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY
The instrument display gives you the following navigation and environment displays:
• Steering
• Engine
Tank level (fuel)
• Weather
• Wind
The instrument display can be programmed to a full screen or three-way split screen.
In the full screen, four displays are shown at the same time. The size of any instrument
display is fixed to the 1/4 screen.
10.1 How to Show the Instrument Display
Set the instrument display referring to section 13.2 then display the (combination)
screen which contains the instrument display.
10.2 How to Select an Instrument Display
You can show steering, engine, tank level, weather or wind data in the instrument dis-
play if you have the related sensors. Select the data to display as follows:
1. Select the instrument display to activate. A orange line is displayed on the top of
the selected instrument display.
2. Select a menu item from the RotoKey menu or the pop-up menu. (The options are
the same in both the RotoKey and pop-up menus.) The data for the selected menu
item is displayed. (See page 13-7 for the menu items.)
Instrument
display
10. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY
10-2
10.3 Instrument Displays
10.3.1 Steering Display
The steering display provides the analog and digital indications shown below.
10.3.2 Engine display
The engine must output engine data in NMEA 2000 format to show the engine data.
The data for a maximum of four engines can be displayed.
HDG: Heading
COG: Course over ground
SOG: Speed over ground
CTS: Course to steer
(Steer to direction)
DTW: Distance to waypoint
TTG: Time to go
XTE: Cross-track error
Steer to direction (P: Port, S: Starboard)
Warning: Lights in red
for engine trouble
other than engine
overheating.
RPM: Revolutions per minute
Engine temperature
Oil pressure
Temperature: Lights in
green for high engine
temperature.
Analog and digital tachometer
104
°
F
1,000.0 rpm
10. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY
10-3
10.3.3 Tank level display
The tank level display provides the digital indications shown below. The data for a
maximum of four tank levels can be displayed.
10.3.4 Weather display
The weather display provides the analog and digital indications shown below.
750
Fuel
G
20
Rate
G/h
Eff.
NM/G
90 %
STARBOARD TANK
5h00’
100
20
95 %
FOURTH TANK
TTG
DTG
NM
STW
kn
90 %
PORT TANK
95 %
THIRD TANK
Fuel level for
starboard tank
Fuel level for
port tank
16
Fuel level for
third tank
Fuel level for
fourth tank
Fuel quantity
Fuel rate
Fuel effect
Time to go
Distance to go
Speed through
the water
4.5
Air: Air temperature
Chill: Wind chill temperature
Dew: Dew point temperature
Press: Barometric pressure
Humid: Relative humidity
Analog wind direction
Digital wind speed
10. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY
10-4
10.3.5 Wind display
The wind display provides digital and analog indications of wind speed and angle.
TWA: True wind angle
TWS: True wind speed
AWA: Apparent wind angle
AWS: Apparent wind speed
Analog wind angle
P: Port, S: Starboard
Indicator color
Blue: True wind, Red: Apparent wind
11-1
11. WEATHER
This TZT provides the weather informations (Sirius (only U.S.) and NavCenter (world-
wide)). When connected to the Sirius Weather Receiver BBWX2, the weather radar
information can be displayed.
Sirius weather receiver
Purchase the Sirius Weather Receiver BBWX2.
Purchase a Sirius weather service subscription. Contact Sirius Satellite Radio INC.,
for additional information.
Connect the BBWX2 and the TZT displays then turn on both of those units. Your
TZT then receives WX data from the BBWX2, which takes approximately 30 min-
utes.
During the installation of the equipment, the Installation Wizard checks if the
BBWX2 is connected to the TZT. If the TZT cannot find the BBWX2, check the con-
nections between the two units.
11.1 Weather Display Introduction
This TZT displays the current and forecasted weather information for your area. The
weather information is updated in real time so that you have current weather informa-
tion for your area and any area in the U.S.
Information provided by the Sirius Marine Weather service is advisory in nature. You,
the customer, agree to release FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD., Sirius Satellite Radio
Inc., Navcast Inc. and WSI Corporation from any problems that occur from this ser-
vice. And you acknowledge that you have read the conditions of your subscription
agreement and agree to all the conditions of the subscription. If you do not have the
subscription agreement, got to www.sirius.com/marineweatheragreement or call 1-
800-869-5480 to have a copy sent to you.
You can put a point from the RotoKey menu ([New Point]) on the weather display.
How to select the weather display
The weather display is overlaid on the 2D display. Select the weather display on the
display selection window.
Weather
display
11. WEATHER
11-2
11.2 NavCenter Weather
You can download the NavCenter data from the internet via Wireless LAN. See
section 1.21 for how to connect to the internet.
Note: Data which is downloaded by a TZT unit can be shared with other TZT units via
the network. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required.
11.2.1 Pre-settings
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Weather].
3. Select [Weather Data Server].
Note: The option [Sirius] appears when connecting BBWX2.
4. Select [NavCenter].
5. Select [Tidal Step].
6. Select the update interval (which determines how often tidal data are captured) for
the tide icon.
NavCenter
Sirius
Weather Data Server
NavCenter
5’00s
10’00s
15’00s
20’00s
30’00s
Tidal Step
10’00s
11. WEATHER
11-3
7. Select [Duration of Animation].
8. Select the update interval for the animation. The larger the time, the slower the
animation moves.
11.2.2 How to download the NavCenter data
1. Select [General] of the main menu.
2. Select [Wireless LAN Settings].
3. Select the [ON] icon in [Wireless].
4. After the internet connection is established, select [Close] to close the [Wireless
LAN settings] window.
5. Select [Weather] of the main
menu to set how many days’
data and which data to down-
load in [NavCenter Down-
load].
6. Select the data model from
[Model]. (The options are
[USA] and [Worldwide].)
7. Drag the circle icon in [Fore-
cast Days] to select how
many days’ data to download.
8. Select the [ON] or [OFF] icon
for each weather item as ap-
propriate.
0’10s
0’15s
0’20s
0’30s
0’45s
Duration of Animation
0’45s
11. WEATHER
11-4
9. If you selected [ON] for [Sea Surface Temperature], set the following menu items.
[Weather Color Transparency]: Adjust the degree of transparency for the weather
overlay. Use a large figure to increase the degree of transparency.
[Auto SST Color Scale]: Activate this feature to adjust the SST color scale auto-
matically according to the sea surface temperature.
[Minimum Value]: Set the minimum value for the SST color when [Auto SST Color
Scale] is deactivated.
[Maximum Value]: Set the maximum value for the SST color when [Auto SST Col-
or Scale] is deactivated.
10. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
11. Select [Get Latest Wx] from the RotoKey menu on the weather display. The fol-
lowing dialogue boxes appear in order.
When the download is finished, the above dialogue box disappears and the unit
beeps.
11.2.3 How to display the NavCenter data
The NavCenter data display provides forecast data that includes [Wind], [Waves],
[SST] (sea surface temperature), [Cloud], [Rain], [Pressure], [500mb], [Air Temp],
[Currents], [Altimetry], [Plankton].
The weather server is preparing your data
Cancel
Downloading weather data
Cancel
11. WEATHER
11-5
1. Select [Wx Data] from the RotoKey menu on the weather display.
2. Select a menu item to display its data.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select all menu items desired.
4. Select [Anim Forecast] from the RotoKey menu. The animation forecast is dis-
played for a specified-day period. To stop the animation display, select [End Anim]
at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
You can operate the animation display with the animation bar at the bottom of the
screen.
11.2.4 How to load a weather file
You can load a weather file saved on an SD card.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Weather].
3. Select [Load Weather File].
4. Select [SD-Right] or [SD-Left].
5. Select the data to load then select [OK].
6. After the equipment has loaded the selected data, select [Close] to exit the menu.
The time scale moves.
Select to start or restart the animation display.
Select to suspend the animation display.
Select to set the time scale to the current time and display the current data.
Load Weather File
SD-Right
OK Cancel
SD-Left
ABCDEFG
11. WEATHER
11-6
11.3 Sirius Weather
Sirius weather radar information and advanced weather information are available in
North America with connection of the Sirius Weather Receiver BBWX2.
11.3.1 Pre-settings
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Weather].
3. Select [Weather Data Server].
4. Select [Sirius].
5. Select [Sirius Weather Radar].
6. Select the sirius weather radar to use, [USNowRadar] (USA) or [CanadianRadar]
(Canada). [USNowRadar] shows the type and level of precipitation. The amount
of precipitation increases with level.
Precipitation indication on USNowRadar.
Weather radar color Precipitation type Level
Light green Rain 15-19 dBz
Medium green Rain 20-29 dBz
Dark green Rain 30-39 dBz
Yellow Rain 40-44 dBz
Orange Rain 45-49 dBz
Light red Rain 50-54 dBz
Dark red Rain over 55 dBz
Light blue Snow 5-19 dBz
Dark blue Snow over 20 dBz
Light pink Mixed 5-19 dBz
Dark pink Mixed over 20 dBz
NavCenter
Sirius
Weather Data Server
NavCenter
USNowRadar
CanadianRadar
Sirius Weather Radar
USNowRadar
11. WEATHER
11-7
Precipitation indication on CanadianRadar
7. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
11.3.2 How to display the Sirius data
[Wx Radar] (Weather radar)
NOWRAD and Canadian weather radar information are put on your chart (see
paragraph 11.3.1). This display lets you see possible storm fronts to help you identify
the clouds from possible sea clutter. To display the weather radar, select [Wx Radar]
from the RotoKey menu.
[Adv Wx Data] (Advanced weather)
The advanced weather display provides the weather data; [Buoys], [City], [Storm],
[Lighting] or [Storm Tracks]. For the icons of these data, see section 11.4.
1. Select [Adv Wx Data] from the RotoKey menu.
2. Select a menu item to display its data.
Weather radar color Level (mm per hour)
Transparent (low precipitation) 0.00 to 0.20 mm/hr
Light green 0.21 to 1.00 mm/hr
Medium green 1.01 to 4.00 mm/hr
Dark green 4.01 to 12.00 mm/hr
Yellow 12.01 to 24.00 mm/hr
Orange 24.01 to 50.00 mm/hr
Light red 50.01 to 100 mm/hr
Dark red over 100.01 mm/hr
Wx radar
display
11. WEATHER
11-8
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select all menu items desired.
[Anim Radar] (Animation radar)
The animation radar display provides the past weather radar information. To show the
animation radar display, select [Anim Radar] from the RotoKey menu. To stop the an-
imation display, select [End Anim] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
11.4 Weather Icons (Sirius Weather)
The table below shows the weather icons that appear on the Sirius weather display.
You can show or hide these icons from the RotoKey menu.
Icon Meaning
Storm cast
Lightning
Surface observa-
tion stations
Wind
City
Currents
Buoy or
CMAN sta.
11. WEATHER
11-9
11.5 Weather Data (NavCenter or Sirius)
The table below shows the weather data available for displaying according to weather
data server (NavCenter or Sirius).
[Wind]: The wind forecast dis-
plays the wind speed by color.
The bar at the top points in the
wind direction.
Storm tracks
Surface pressure
Items NavCenter Sirius Item NavCenter Sirius
Wind Yes Yes Currents Yes No
Waves Yes Yes Altimetry Yes No
SST Yes Yes Plankton Yes No
Cloud Yes No Buoys No Yes
Rain Yes No City No Yes
Pressure Yes Yes Storm No Yes
500mb Yes No Lightning No Yes
Air Temp Yes No Storm Tracks No Yes
Icon Meaning
etc.
<5
5
<
, <9
=
9
<
, <14
=
14
<
, <19
=
19
<
=
Direction
Wind speed
in knot
( )
11. WEATHER
11-10
[Waves]: The waves forecast dis-
plays wave height with color. 0
foot (minimum) is displayed in
light blue, 35 feet (maximum) in
red.
[SST] (Sea surface temperature):
This data layer shows the temper-
ature of the sea surface in
shades. Lower temperatures are
in dark blue, higher in red.
On the screen, you can turn on or
off the automatic SST scale with
tapping [Auto].
Set the minimum or maximum val-
ue for which to show SST. See
page 3-4 on how to set the value.
This is available when [Auto] is
off.
[Cloud]: The cloud forecast dis-
plays cloud images. 8% of cloud
amount (minimum) is displayed in
white, 100% (maximum) in black.
The cloud amount under 8% is
transparent.
[Rain]: The rain forecast displays
rain images. 0.1 mm/hour of rain-
fall (minimum) is displayed in
green, 5 mm/hour (maximum) in
dark violet.
22.55 °F
89.65 °F
Auto
For minimum value For maximum value
11. WEATHER
11-11
[Pressure]: The pressure forecast
displays surface pressure.
[500mb]: The 500mb forecast dis-
plays the contour lines over 500
mb.
Pressure icon Meaning
High pressure
Low pressure
Warm front
Cold front
Occluded front
Stationary front
Trough
Squall line
Dry line
Isobars
1020
18
1010
980
11. WEATHER
11-12
[Air Temp]: The air temp forecast
displays the air temperature by
color. -45°C (-49°F) (minimum) is
displayed in dark violet, 45°C
(113°F) (maximum) is displayed in
red.
[Currents]: The current forecast
displays the tidal current speed
and direction by blue arrow. The
darker the blue, the faster the cur-
rent speed (0 to 2 kn).
[Altimetry]: The altimetry forecast
displays the sea height anomalies
by color. The large anomalies are
displayed in red, smaller ones in
light green.
[Plankton]: The plankton forecast displays the plankton growth in tones of green. The
darker the green, the greater the density of plankton.
[Buoys]: You can check the marine observa-
tions and the information of buoys.
Select a buoy icon ( ) to display the buoy in-
formation.
11. WEATHER
11-13
[City]: The city weather forecasts
are available where city icons are
shown. Select a city icon ( ) to
display the city information.
[Storm]: The storm cast icon ( ) shows
the direction and speed of a storm when the
icon is selected.
[Lightning]: The lightning icons show
where lightning has hit, within the last 5,
10 and 15 minutes. The fill color of the
icon indicates when the lightning hit oc-
curred. The number of lightning bolt mark-
ers indicates the number of times lightning
has hit. To find lightning information, se-
lect a lightning icon.
Lightning icons Meaning
Last 0-5 min. (orange)
Last 5-10 min. (medium yellow)
Last 10-15 min. (Light yellow)
11. WEATHER
11-14
[Storm Tracks]: The storm track icons show major storms in your area. These storms
include tropical disturbances, depressions, storms and cyclones, hurricanes, ty-
phoons and super typhoons. These symbols are displayed in three different colors:
gray (historical), red (current), and orange (forecast).
11.6 Weather Reports
Marine zone forecasts, marine warnings, tropical information and sirius diagnostic are
sent to your TZT.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Weather].
3. Select [Zone Forecast], [Marine Warnings], [Tropical Infos] or [Sirius Diagnostic].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Storm track icons Meaning
Hurricane (Category 1-5)
Tropical storm
Tropical disturbance, Tropical depression
Zone forecast
Marine Warnings
Tropical Infos
Sirius Diagnostic
12-1
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM (AIS)
12.1 AIS Introduction
AIS is a system that continuously transmits the identification and position of your ship
to other nearby ships. All such ships also receive data from other AIS equipped ships
and display their positions and other relevant information. The AIS broadcasts this in-
formation over a VHF transceiver. Data include:
12.2 How to Show or Hide the AIS Symbols
1. On the radar display or chart plotter display, select [Targets] from the RotoKey
menu.
2. To show the AIS symbols, select [AIS/DSC]. To hide the AIS symbols, deselect
[AIS/DSC].
12.3 AIS Target Symbols
• Position • Call sign
Name of ship Speed over ground
Course over ground Name of position-fixing equipment
Position of position-fixing equipment Rate of turn
• Heading
Target
type
Symbol Description
Activated
AIS target
COG is marked on the symbol
with a dotted line.
Danger-
ous AIS
target
The target whose values for
both CPA and TCPA are
smaller than [CPA Alarm Val-
ue] and [TCPA Alarm Value],
which are set in [Targets] of
the main menu, is indicated as
a dangerous target.
Color: Blue for the Class A AIS
: Green for the Class B AIS
SOG and
COG vector
ROT (Rate of Turn)
Heading line
Color: Red
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-2
Other AIS symbols that may appear are shown in the table below.
12.4 Proximity AIS Target Alarm
When an AIS target is within the distance set, the alarm indication "Proximity AIS
Alarm" appears in the status bar and flashes and the audio alarm sounds. (See
paragraph 2.10.7).
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Targets].
3. To activate the alarm, select the [ON] icon in [Proximity AIS Target Alarm]. To de-
activate the alarm, select the [OFF] icon.
4. Select [Proximity AIS Target Alarm Value] to open the software keyboard.
5. Set the alarm value then select [Confirm].
6. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Lost AIS
target
An AIS target becomes a lost
target if a signal is not re-
ceived from the AIS target for
x* minutes. The lost target
symbol is erased if a signal is
not received for an additional
x* minutes.
*: The time depends on the
AIS transponder. Check the
operator’s manual for your AIS
transponder for information
about lost targets.
Symbol Meaning
AtoN
Base Station
Aircraft
SART
Target
type
Symbol Description
Color
- AIS target: Blue for the Class A AIS
: Green for the Class B AIS
- Cross: Red
100 yd
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-3
12.5 How to Ignore the AIS Targets
In the default setting, all AIS targets within 12 NM* from your ship are shown on the
display. Slow-moving targets within the AIS proximity alarm range cause frequent vi-
olation of the alarm. You can prevent this frequent violation if you ignore targets within
the alarm range that are slower than the value you set.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Targets] - [Ignore Alarms for AIS Slower than...] menu to open the soft-
ware keyboard. This menu item prevents frequent violation of the AIS proximity
alarm against AIS targets that are slower than the value set here.
3. Set a speed then select [Confirm]. The setting range is 0.0 - 9.9 (knots).
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
*: You can change this value. You can hide the AIS symbols that are beyond the dis-
tance you set here.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Targets] - [Hide AIS Targets Farther than...] menu.
3. Select a distance. Targets at a distance greater than set here are not shown on
the screen.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
1.000 NM
2.000 NM
3.000 NM
6.000 NM
12.00 NM
Hide AIS Targets Farther than...
12.00 NM
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-4
12.6 How to Display the Target Data
Select an AIS target to display the simple information. To get the detailed information,
select an AIS target to display the pop-up menu then select [Info]. The detailed infor-
mation display can also be shown by selecting the simple information display.
12.7 How to Show and Hide the Target IDs
You can show or hide the target ID of AIS targets.
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Targets].
3. Select the [ON] or [OFF] icon in [Display Target IDs].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
Target Info
Nickname
Name
VIVTORIA 3
MMSI
366902890
Call Sign
WYX2158
COG 263.4°
SOG
0.0 kn
CPA
0.770 NM
TCPA
1’35s
Range
0.876 NM
Bearing 210.4°
Destination
WSF TERMINAL
Vessel Type
Passenger ships - All ships of this type
Vessel Status
0: Under Way Using Engine
Heading 294.0°
ROT
+0.0°/m
Status Tracking
Time 0’00s
Vessel Length
800 ft
Vessel Width
120 ft
Danger
Position N 47°47.692’; W122°29.653’
Simple information
Detailed information
ฬ೨
ᣇ૏
〒㔌
MMSI
CPA
TCPA
VICTORIA CLIPPER 3
366902890
1.2 kn
1'35s
SOG
210.4°
Name
Bearing
Range
0.876 NM
0.770 NM
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-5
12.8 AIS List
How to open the AIS list
1. Select [Lists] on the menu icon bar to open the lists menu.
2. Select [AIS List].
The data for the AIS dangerous targets are displayed in red.
How to display the detailed information for AIS
1. Select the AIS to display the detailed information on the AIS list.
AIS List
DSC List
ARPA List
AIS List
Detail
Find On Chart
Edit Nickname
ANAIS
518111000
Name/Mmsi
Range/Bearing
Cpa/Tcpa
1.959 NM
268.6
°
0.661 NM
-10’ 59s
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-6
2. Select [Detail].
3. Select [Close] to close the [Target Info] window.
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
How to find an AIS target on the chart display
1. Select the AIS target to find on the AIS list.
2. Select [Find On Chart].
The chart plotter display opens and the selected AIS is zoomed in.
How to edit an AIS nickname
1. Select the AIS target to edit the nickname on the AIS list.
2. Select [Edit Nickname] to display the software keyboard.
3. Enter the nickname. The maximum length of the nickname is 20 alphanumeric
characters.
4. Select [Confirm].
5. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
12.9 How to Register an AIS or DSC to the Buddies
List
The buddies list provides a quick reference to ships’ MMSI and nickname. For exam-
ple, you might want to enter the MMSI and nickname of partner ships or ships that of-
ten operate in your area.
How to add an MMSI no. to the buddies list
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select [Targets].
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-7
3. Select [Buddies List (AIS & DSC)].
4. Select [Add] to open the numeric software keyboard.
5. Enter the MMSI number then select [Confirm].
6. Select [Nickname] to open the alphabetical software keyboard.
7. Enter the nickname then select [Confirm].
8. Select [Close].
9. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
12. AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)
12-8
How to delete an entry from the buddies list
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [Targets] - [Buddies List (AIS & DSC)] menu.
3. Select the [MMSI] field in the AIS or DSC to delete then select [Remove].
4. Select [Close] twice to exit the menu.
13-1
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
After you understand the basic operation procedures of your equipment, you can set
the equipment according to your needs.
Set the equipment according to your system configuration.
Change how the equipment operates and displays information.
All the adjustments are done from the menu. To restore the default settings for the se-
lected menu, select [Reset Default Settings] that is provided on each menu.
Some of the items which you can adjust are as follows:
13.1 RotoKey Mode
The user can select how many menu items to make available with the RotoKey
TM
(touch control for TZTBB) in the chart plotter, weather, radar, sounder, instrument and
camera modes. The two quantities are [Base] and [Full].
The table below shows the menu items available for use in the chart plotter, weather,
radar, sounder, instrument and camera modes.
Note: The menu items shown on the screen depend on your system configuration,
equipment settings or functions in current use.
Menu items available in the chart plotter mode
RotoKey mode Data boxes Units of measurement
• System settings • Charts
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Route Stop Nav. Stop following a route. Yes Yes
Restart Nav. Restart course. Yes Yes
Skip Wpt Skip a go to point on a route. Yes Yes
Orientation North Up Set orientation mode to north up. Yes Yes
Head Up Set orientation mode to head up. Yes Yes
Track Rec. - Record track of your ship. Yes Yes
Event - Put an event mark. Yes Yes
Lat/Lon - Create a point using the software
keyboard.
Yes Yes
3D - Switch the display view from 2D to
3D.
Yes Yes
Chart Raster Show raster chart. Yes Yes
S-57 Show S-57 chart. Yes Yes
Jeppesen Show Jeppesen chart. Yes Yes
Navionics Show navionics chart. Yes Yes
Fishing Show fishing chart. Yes Yes
Auto Switch the chart type automatical-
ly.
Yes Yes
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-2
Overlay Radar Show or hide radar overlay. Yes Yes
Sat Photo Show or hide satellite photo over-
lay.
Yes Yes
Dpth Shade Show or hide depth shading over-
lay.
Yes Yes
Tide Icons Show or hide tide icons. Yes Yes
Currents Show or hide tidal currents. Yes Yes
Accu Fish Activate or deactivate ACCU-
FISH
TM
.
No Yes
Points Show or hide points. No Yes
Routes Show or hide routes. No Yes
Tracks Show or hide tracks. No Yes
Targets AIS/DSC Show or hide AIS and DSC icons. No Yes
ARPA Show or hide ARPA. No Yes
Cancel All Cancel tracking on all targets. No Yes
Clear Lost Clear lost ARPA targets. No Yes
Radar Tx Radar Switch between transmission and
stand-by.
No Yes
Transparency Set the degree of transparency for
radar overlay display.
No Yes
Auto Gain Adjust the gain automatically. No Yes
Manual Gain Adjust the gain manually. No Yes
Auto Sea Adjust the sea clutter automatical-
ly.
No Yes
Manual Sea Adjust the sea clutter manually. No Yes
Auto Rain Adjust the rain clutter automatical-
ly.
No Yes
Manual Rain Adjust the rain clutter manually. No Yes
Echo Trail Show or hide echo trail. No Yes
Clear Trail Clear echo trails and restart with
new echo trails.
No Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14 only)
NavData Open the data boxes. No Yes
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-3
Menu items available in the weather mode
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Wx Radar - Show or hide weather radar overlay. Yes Yes
Wx Data Wind Show or hide wind icon. Yes Yes
Waves Show or hide wave data. Yes Yes
SST Show or hide sea surface tempera-
ture data.
Yes Yes
Cloud Show or hide cloud data. Yes Yes
Rain Show or hide rain data. Yes Yes
Pressure Show or hide surface pressure data. Yes Yes
500mb Show or hide contour lines over 500
mb.
No Yes
Air Temp Show or hide air temperature data. No Yes
Currents Show or hide tidal current data by ar-
rows.
No Yes
Altimetry Show or hide sea height anomalies
data.
No Yes
Plankton Show or hide plankton data. No Yes
Adv Wx Data Buoys Show or hide buoy icon. Yes Yes
City Show or hide city icon. Yes Yes
Storm Show or hide storm cast icon. Yes Yes
Lightning Show or hide lighting icon. Yes Yes
Storm Tracks Show or hide storm track icon. Yes Yes
Marine Zone Show or hide marine zone. (The
coastal waters are divided into zones
for forecasts. These zones can be
displayed on the screen with lines.)
Yes Yes
Anim Radar - Display the animation for the past
weather radar information.
Yes Yes
Anim Forecast - Display the animation for the weather
forecast.
Yes Yes
Chart Raster Show raster chart. Yes Yes
S-57 Show S-57 chart. Yes Yes
Jeppesen Show Jeppesen chart. Yes Yes
Navionics Show Navionics chart. Yes Yes
Fishing Show fishing chart. Yes Yes
Auto Switch the chart type automatically. Yes Yes
Overlay Sat Photo Show or hide satellite photo overlay. Yes Yes
Tide Icons Show or hide tide icons. Yes Yes
Currents Show or hide tidal currents. Yes Yes
Points Show or hide points and event marks. Yes Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14
only)
NavData Open the data boxes. No Yes
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
Get Latest Wx - Get the latest weather forecast with
internet connection.
Yes Yes
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-4
Menu items available in the radar mode
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Tx Radar - Switch between transmission and stand-
by.
Yes Yes
Radar Adjust Auto Gain Adjust the gain automatically. Yes Yes
Manual Gain Adjust the gain manually. Yes Yes
Auto Sea Adjust the sea clutter automatically. Yes Yes
Manual Sea Adjust the sea clutter manually. Yes Yes
Auto Rain Adjust the rain clutter automatically. Yes Yes
Manual Rain Adjust the rain clutter manually. Yes Yes
Auto Sea Mode Advanced Activate or deactivate the auto sea for
open waters.
No Yes
Coastal Activate or deactivate the auto sea for
coastal waters.
No Yes
Radar Filters Int Reject Activate or deactivate the interference re-
jector.
No Yes
Stretch Activate or deactivate the echo stretch. No Yes
Average Activate or deactivate the echo average. No Yes
Rings - Show or hide the range rings. Yes Yes
Orientation Head Up Set orientation mode to head up. No Yes
North Up Set orientation mode to north up. No Yes
Hdg Ln Off - Hide the heading line and range rings for
a few seconds.
No Yes
Echo Trail - Show or hide echo trails. No Yes
Clear Trail - Clear echo trails and restart with new
echo trails.
No Yes
EBL Adjust Set the EBL (setting range: 0.0 to
359.9°).
No Yes
Clear Erase the EBL. No Yes
VRM Adjust Set the VRM (setting range: 0 yd to 8.000
NM)
No Yes
Clear Erase the VRM. No Yes
Guard Zone Visible Show guard zone. Yes Yes
Alarm Activate or deactivate guard zone. Yes Yes
Auto Acquire Activate or deactivate auto acquisition of
ARPA targets.
Yes Yes
Resize Resize guard zone. Yes Yes
WatchMan - Turn on or off the watchman function. No Yes
Targets AIS/DSC Show or hide AIS and DSC. Yes Yes
ARPA Show or hide ARPA. Yes Yes
Cancel All Cancel tracking on all targets. Yes Yes
Clear Lost Clear lost ARPA targets. Yes Yes
Active Rte - Show or hide active route. No Yes
CPA Alarm - Activate or deactivate CPA alarm. No Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14
only)
NavData Open the data boxes. No Yes
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-5
Menu items available in the sounder mode
Menu items available in the camera mode
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Frequency HF Activate HF display. Yes Yes
LF Activate LF display. Yes Yes
Mode Single Freq. Activate single frequency display. Yes Yes
Dual Freq. Activate dual frequency display. Yes Yes
Btm Lock Activate bottom lock display. Yes Yes
Btm Zoom Activate bottom zoom display. Yes Yes
Adjust Auto Fishing Activate automatic fishing mode. Yes Yes
Auto Cruising Activate automatic cruising mode. Yes Yes
Manual Activate manual mode. Yes Yes
HF Gain Adjust the gain for high frequency in-
dividually in manual mode.
Yes Yes
LF Gain Adjust the gain for low frequency indi-
vidually in manual mode.
Yes Yes
Auto Range - Activate or deactivate auto range. Yes Yes
A-scope - Show or hide A-scope display. Yes Yes
Fish Alarm - Activate or deactivate fish alarm. No Yes
Accu Fish -
Activate or deactivate ACCU-FISH
TM
.
Yes Yes
Bottom Type (BBDS1
and DFF1-UHD)
- Show or hide bottom discrimination
display.
Yes Yes
Event - Put an event mark. No Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14 only)
NavData Open the data boxes. No Yes
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Analog 1* - Display the image from analog 1. Yes Yes
Analog 2* - Display the image from analog 2. Yes Yes
IP 1* - Display the image from IP camera 1. Yes Yes
IP 2* - Display the image from IP camera 2. Yes Yes
IP 3* - Display the image from IP camera 3. Yes Yes
IP 4* - Display the image from IP camera 4. Yes Yes
Quad - Display the four images from axis server 241Q. Yes Yes
Input 1* - Display the image for input 1 from axis server
241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 2* - Display the image for input 2 from axis server
241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 3* - Display the image for input 3 from axis server
241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 4* - Display the image for input 4 from axis server
241Q.
Yes Yes
Quad 2 - Display the four images from second axis serv-
er 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 1* - Display the image for input 1 from second axis
server 241Q.
Yes Yes
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-6
Input 2* - Display the image for input 2 from second axis
server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 3* - Display the image for input 3 from second axis
server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 4* - Display the image for input 4 from second axis
server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Cycle - Cycle the images selected. Yes Yes
Cycle Config. Analog 1* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
analog 1.
Yes Yes
Analog 2* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
analog 2.
Yes Yes
IP 1* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
IP camera 1.
Yes Yes
IP 2* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
IP camera 2.
Yes Yes
IP 3* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
IP camera 3.
Yes Yes
IP 4* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image from
IP camera 4.
Yes Yes
Quad Activate or deactivate cycle of the four images
from axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 1* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 1 from axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 2* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 2 from axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 3* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 3 from axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 4* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 4 from axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Quad 2 Activate or deactivate cycle of the four images
from second axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 1* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 1 from second axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 2* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 2 from second axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 3* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 3 from second axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Input 4* Activate or deactivate cycle of the image for in-
put 4 from second axis server 241Q.
Yes Yes
Zoom In - Zoom in the image from FLIR. Yes Yes
Zoom Out - Zoom out the image from FLIR. Yes Yes
FLIR Mode Thermal Display the thermal image from FLIR. Yes Yes
Visible Display the visible image from FLIR. Yes Yes
FLIR Scene Day
Running
Set the best viewing when navigating in day-
time.
No Yes
Night
Running
Set the best viewing when navigating in night-
time.
No Yes
Night
Docking
Set the best viewing when docking at night. No Yes
MOB Set the best viewing to detect the MOB posi-
tion.
No Yes
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-7
*: These labels are replaced with the nicknames if they are set in [Camera] of the main
menu.
Menu items available in the instruments mode
How to select the RotoKey mode to use
You can select the RotoKey mode to use from [Base] or [Full].
1. Select [Menu] on the menu icon bar to open the main menu.
2. Select the [General] - [RotoKeys] menu.
3. Select [Base] or [Full].
4. Select [Close] to exit the menu.
TZT9/TZT14: The [Full] set can be always selected by long pushing the RotoKey
TM
.
FLIR Home - Put the FLIR camera into the home position.
Resore the FLIR camera to the normal magnifi-
cation.
Yes Yes
Contrast - Adjust the contrast for video image. No Yes
Brightness - Adjust the brightness for video image. No Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14
only)
NavData Open the data boxes. No Yes
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Steering - Show steering display. Yes Yes
Engine (If one en-
gine only)
- Show engine display. Yes Yes
Engines (If more
than one engine)
All Show all engines display. Yes Yes
Engine 1 Show engine 1 display. Yes Yes
Engine 2 Show engine 2 display. Yes Yes
Engine 3 Show engine 3 display. Yes Yes
Engine 4 Show engine 4 display. Yes Yes
Tank Level - Show tank level display. Yes Yes
Weather - Show weather display. Yes Yes
Wind - Show wind display. Yes Yes
Display
(TZT9/TZT14 only)
Menu Open the main menu. No Yes
Lists Open the lists. No Yes
Tide Open the tide graph. No Yes
Control label
Function Base Full
Level 1 Level 2
Base
Full
RotoKeys
Base
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-8
13.2 How to Set the Display Selection Window
The section 1.4 shows how to arrange the display selection window to your liking. The
default display selection window provides seven displays in configurations according
to the equipment that you have in your network. If the arrangement does not meet your
requirements, you can change the configurations as necessary. You can set a maxi-
mum of 10 displays to show and split a display up to three ways. For example, you can
show the radar and sounder (fish finder) displays in a two-way split screen.
You can select how to split a display by three different methods: full-screen, two-way
and three-way. The displays available depend on the display division selected and
your system configuration. The table below describes display division and possible
display.
How to add a new screen
Set the display selection window as follows:
1. Press the Home key (or tap the Home icon) to show the display selection window.
2. Select [Edit] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
Display division Possible display
Full Plotter, weather, radar, sounder, instrument, camera
Two-way split Plotter, radar, sounder
Three-way split Plotter, radar, sounder, instrument, camera
Add a new screen
Default
Close
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-9
3. Select [+] for [Add a new screen].
4. Drag the desired display division (full-screen, two-way or three-way) to the custom
display area.
5. Drag the desired display from the possible displays to the custom display area.
6. Select [Save] to save the setting. Your arrangement of displays appears on the
screen and the display selection window is updated according to your arrange-
ment.
How to delete a screen
A maximum of 10 screens can be used. If you need to add another screen, delete an
unnecessary screen to make space.
1. Press the Home key (or tap the Home icon) to show the display selection window.
2. Select [Edit] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
3. Select [×] in the screen to delete.
4. Select [Close].
Note: When a sounder or plotter sensor is installed, the default screens are automat-
ically set according to the sensor. The default screens cannot be deleted. The number
of screens which you can add, edit or delete decreases according to the number of the
default screens. For example, when a sounder, radar and plotter sensors are installed,
the two-way split screen for sounder/plotter and the full screens for plotter and radar
are set as the default screens. These three screens cannot be edited or deleted. In
this case, a maximum of seven screens can be added, edited or deleted.
Display
division
Custom display area
Possible displays
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-10
13.3 General and Units Menus
The [General] menu of the main menu includes the RotoKeys settings, data boxes set-
tings, key beep, etc. The [Units] menu sets units of measurement for range, depth,
height, speed, etc.
[General] menu
[General] menu description
Menu item Function Options
[RotoKeys] Select the RotoKey menu to show with a short
press of the RotoKey
TM
(for TZT9/TZT14) or
short tap (for TZTBB). See section 13.1.
[Base], [Full]
Base
Select
10
ㆬᛯ
RotoKeys
Function Gesture
Event
Connect to the Internet
When Necessary
Wireless LAN Settings
NavData Transparency
Allow Remote Control
Full Control
Local Time Offset
UTC
Synchronize Time with GPS
NavData Multi Data Dwell Time
0’03s
Camera Dwell Time
0’03s
User Interface Auto-Hide
0’05s
Synchronization Notification
Key Beep
Launch Demo Mode
Select
Demo Slide Show
Manual Demo Heading
Manual Demo Speed
Language
English (United States)
Check for Software Update
Update
Reset Default Settings
Reset
45.0
°
5.0 kn
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-11
*: In the demo displays, you can move the position for the boat icon to the position
tapped. Select [Move Boat] from the RotoKey menu. To return to the original position,
select the boat icon then deselect [Manual Mode] from the RotoKey menu.
[Function Ges-
ture]
Select the function to do by tapping the screen
with two fingers (see section 1.14).
[None], [Screen Capture],
[Event], [MOB], [Home],
[Menu], [Lists], [Tide],
[Fusion], [Fusion Ctrl]
[Connect to the
Internet]
Select when to connect to the internet. Select
[When Necessary] normally.
[Never], [At Startup],
[When Necessary]
[Wireless LAN
Settings]
Create a local network or connect an existing LAN
network (see section 1.21).
-
[Allow Remote
Control]
Select the operating range by a remote control. [Off], [View Only],
[Full Control]
[Local Time Off-
set]
Select the time difference between local time and
UTC time.
UTC -12:00 to UTC + 13:00
(at one-hour intervals)
[Synchronize
Time with GPS]
Activate or deactivate synchronizing time with
GPS.
[ON], [OFF]
[NavData Trans-
parency]
Set the degree of transparency of the data box
([DATA 1], [DATA 2] and [RADAR]) (see
paragraph 1.11.3).
0 to 80%
[NavData Multi
Data Dwell
Time]
Select the cycling time of data in the data box (see
paragraph 1.11.2).
[2 s], [3 s], [5 s], [10 s]
[Camera Dwell
Time]
Select the cycle period for video images (see
paragraph 9.3.5).
[2 s], [3 s], [5 s], [10 s]
[User Interface
Auto-Hide]
Select the time to wait before closing the RotoKey
menu, pop-up menu and tooltip when no opera-
tion is found.
[2 s], [3 s], [5 s], [10 s]
[Synchroniza-
tion Notification]
Turn on or off the notification for data sharing on
multiple TZT network.
[ON], [OFF]
[Key Beep] Activate or deactivate the key beep which sounds
when a key (Home, RotoKey
TM
or ) is operat-
ed (see section 1.1).
[ON], [OFF]
[Launch Demo
Mode]*
Open [Demo Files List]. Select the data to play. -
[Demo Slide
Show]*
Activate or deactivate switching the demo dis-
plays every minute between chart plotter, weath-
er, radar and sounder.
[ON], [OFF]
[Manual Demo
Heading]*
Set the heading in demo displays. 0 to 360°
[Manual Demo
Speed]*
Set the ship’s speed in demo displays. 0 to 20 kn
[Language] Select the language to use (see section 1.15). [English (United States)],
[English (United Kingdom)],
and others
[Check for Soft-
ware Update]
Update the software version. -
[Reset Default
Settings]
Restore default settings for the [General] menu. -
Menu item Function Options
13. HOW TO ADJUST SETTINGS
13-12
[Units] menu
[Units] menu description
Menu item Options
[Bearing Display] [Magnetic], [True]
The mode (magnetic or true) of all heading and bearing data.
[True Wind Calculation
Reference]
[Ground], [Surface]
Select wind value to display from speed over ground or speed through
water (surface).
[Position Format] [DDD°MM.mmmm’], [DDD°MM.mmm’], [DDD°MM.mm’],
[DDD°MM’SS.ss”], [DDD.dddddd°], [Loran-C], [MGRS]
[Loran C Station & GRI] Select the Loran C stations and GRIs to use to get Loran C position.
[Range (Long)] [Nautical Mile], [Kilometer], [Mile]
[Range (Short)] [Foot], [Meter], [Yard]
[Short/Long Change Over] Set the distance at which to change between short and long range. Set
the long range here.
[Depth] [Foot], [Meter], [Fathom], [Passi Braza]
[Height/Length] [Foot], [Meter]
[Temperature] [Fahrenheit Degree], [Celsius Degree]
[Boat Speed] [Knot], [Kilometer per Hour], [Mile per Hour], [Meter per Second]
[Wind Speed] [Knot], [Kilometer per Hour], [Mile per Hour], [Meter per Second]
[Atmospheric Pressure] [HectoPascal], [Millibar], [Millimeter of Mercury], [Inch of Mercury]
[Oil Pressure] [KiloPascal], [Bar], [Pound per Square Inch]
[Volume] [Gallon], [Liter]
[Reset Default Settings] Restore default settings for the [Units] menu.
Magnetic
Select
Bearing Display
Position Format
DDD
°
MM.mmm’
Loran C Station & GRI
Range (Long)
Range (Short)
Short/Long Change Over
Depth
Height/Length
Temperature
Fahrenheit Degree
Boat Speed
Knot
Wind Speed
Atmospheric Pressure
Oil Pressure
Volume
Reset Default Settings
Reset
Nautical Mile
Yard
0.500 NM
Foot
Foot
Knot
HectoPascal
Pound per Square Inch
Gallon
True Wind Calculation Reference
Surface
14-1
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
This chapter has information about maintenance and troubleshooting that the user
can follow to care for the equipment.
14.1 Maintenance
Routine maintenance helps keep your equipment in good condition and prevents fu-
ture problems. Check the items shown in the table below to help keep your equipment
in good condition for years to come.
Check item Check point Remedy
Cables Check that all cables are
fastened. Check the cables
for corrosion.
Connect the cables that have loosened.
Replace any damaged cables.
Cabinet Dust on the cabinet Remove dust with a dry clean cloth. Do
not use commercial cleaners to clean
the equipment. Those cleaners can re-
move paint and markings.
LCD Dust on the LCD Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent
scratching, using tissue paper and an
LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt de-
posits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping
slowly with tissue paper so as to dis-
solve the dirt or salt. Change paper fre-
quently so the salt or dirt will not scratch
the LCD. Do not use solvents such as
thinner, acetone or benzene for clean-
ing. Also, do not use degreaser or anti-
fog solution, as they can strip the
coating from the LCD.
Waterdrops on the LCD Wipe the LCD with a dry cloth to remove
the water. Waterdrops on the LCD can
cause slow touch response.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified persons can
work inside the equipment.
NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive
sealant or contact spray to plastic
parts or equipment coating.
Those items contain products that can
damage plastic parts and equipment
coating.
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
14-2
14.2 Life of the Parts
Fuse replacement
The TZT has a fuse that protects the TZT from high electric current and equipment
fault. If you cannot turn on the power, check the fuse to see if it has blown. Find the
reason for the blown fuse before you replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again after the
replacement, contact your dealer for information. A wrong fuse can damage the equip-
ment.
Lithium battery replacement
The lithium battery on the Main board in this equipment keeps the time data of the in-
ternal clock alive when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is approximately
three years (in power-off). When the voltage of the battery is low, the message re-
questing replacement appears at the top of the screen. When this occurs, contact your
dealer about replacement of the battery.
Note: Dispose of the battery in accordance with local regulations.
Radar antenna Dirt on the radar antenna
can reduce the sensitivity.
Clean the radiator (or radome) with a
cloth wetted with freshwater. Do not use
commercial cleaners to clean the radia-
tor. Those cleaners can remove paint
and markings.
Name Type Code No. Remarks
Fuse FGBO-A 125V 4A PBF 000-155-851-10 For TZT9/TZTBB, 24 VDC
Fuse FGBO 125V 7A PBF 000-155-831-10 For TZT9, 12 VDC
Fuse FGBO-A 125V 5A PBF 000-155-853-10 For TZT14, 24 VDC
Fuse FGBO 125V 10A PBF 000-155-826-10 For TZT14/TZTBB, 12 VDC
Part Type Code No. Remarks
Lithium battery CR2032H - Use of Japanese make bat-
tery is recommended.
Check item Check point Remedy
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
A wrong fuse can damage the equipment
and cause fire.
Use the proper lithium battery.
A wrong lithium battery may burst.
CAUTION
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
14-3
Magnetron replacement
When the life of the magnetron is reached, targets do not appear on the radar display.
If long-range performance appears to have decreased, contact your dealer about re-
placement of the magnetron.
The total time of power-on ("ON TIME") and transmission ("TX TIME") are displayed
on the radar screen during the stand-by mode.
LCD replacement (for TZT9/TZT14)
The life of the LCD is approximately 18,000 hours for TZT14, 25,000 hours for TZT9.
The actual number of hours depends on ambient temperature and humidity. When the
brilliance cannot be raised sufficiently, contact your dealer about replacement of the
LCD.
Fan replacement
The life of the each fan is shown in the table below. The actual number of hours de-
pends on ambient temperature. When the fan does not rotate sufficiently, an applica-
ble message appears. Turn off the power and contact your dealer about replacement
of the fan.
Radar Sensor Magnetron Code No. Estimated Life
DRS2D E3590 000-164-574-11 Approx. 2,000 hours
DRS4D E3571 000-146-867-11 Approx. 2,000 hours
DRS4A MAF1421B 000-158-786-11 Approx. 3,000 hours
DRS6A MAF1422B 000-158-788-12 Approx. 3,000 hours
DRS12A MAF1565N 000-174-559-10 Approx. 3,000 hours
DRS25A MG5436(E2V) 000-140-762-10 Approx. 2,000 to
3,000 hours
Item Type Code No. Estimated Life
FAN MOTOR MFB52A-12HA-002 000-175-998-10 Approx. 21,000 hours
FAN MOTOR MFB30G-12A-003
(TZT9/TZT14 only)
000-175-997-10 Approx. 21,000 hours
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
14-4
14.3 Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can follow to
restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not check inside
the unit. Have a qualified technician check the equipment.
14.3.1 General troubleshooting
14.3.2 Radar troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
You can not turn on the power. Check for blown fuse.
Check that the power connector is fastened.
Check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
Check for damaged power cable.
Check battery for correct voltage output.
There is no response when a
key is pressed.
Turn off and on the power. If you do not get a response, the key is
damaged. Contact your dealer for instructions.
For TZTBB: Picture is not dis-
played properly.
Turn off and on the power. If you do not get a proper picture, con-
tact your dealer for instructions.
For TZTBB: Nothing appears
on the screen after you press
the key.
Check if the monitor is powered.
Check if the monitor cable is connected.
Problem Remedy
Nothing appears on the screen
after you press the key and
select [Tx Radar] from the Ro-
toKey menu to transmit.
Select [Tx Radar] from the RotoKey menu again.
Check that the antenna cable is fastened.
Check if the radar source is correct.
Marks and characters appear,
but echoes do not appear.
Check that the antenna cable is fastened.
Picture is not updated or the
picture freezes.
Check antenna cable.
If the picture freezes, turn the power off and on.
You tuned the receiver, but the
sensitivity is weak.
Have a technician check the magnetron.
You changed the range, but the
radar picture does not change.
Try to zoom in or out the radar display.
Turn the power off and on.
Poor discrimination in range. Adjust the sea control.
Range rings are not displayed. Select [Rings] from the RotoKey menu to activate the range rings.
You selected [Tx Radar] from
the RotoKey menu to transmit.
The "TX screen" appears, but
the radar goes into stand-by.
This problem indicates that the overload protection has activated.
To restore normal operation, turn off all equipment in the TZT net-
work. Wait a few seconds then turn on all the equipment.
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
14-5
14.3.3 Chart plotter troubleshooting
14.3.4 Fish finder troubleshooting
Problem Remedy
Position is not fixed. Check that antenna connector is fastened and navigator is cor-
rectly connected.
The track of your ship is not
plotted.
Check that the track is turned on. Select the [Overlay] - [Tracks]
menu from the RotoKey menu.
Problem Remedy
You selected a fish finder dis-
play at the display selection
window, but no picture appears.
Check that the signal cable for the fish finder is fastened.
Check that the fish finder source is correct.
Check that the network fish finder is properly connected.
Marks and characters appear,
but no picture appears.
Check that the transducer cable is connected.
Picture appears but zero line
does not appear.
The picture is shifted. Check the shift setting.
Check if draft is set to zero or higher.
The picture sensitivity is too
low.
Check the gain setting in manual operation.
The marine life or air bubbles can attach to the transducer face.
Bottom is too soft to return an acceptable echo.
The depth indication does not
appear.
For manual operation, adjust gain and range to display the bot-
tom echo (in reddish-brown).
Adjust bottom level HF/LF.
Noise or interference shows on
the display.
Make sure the transducer cable is not near the engine.
Check the ground.
Check if another fish finder in the vicinity of your boat has the
same frequency as your fish finder.
Try to adjust the interference rejection: Select the [Sounder] -
[Interference Rejection] menu of the main menu.
14. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
14-6
This page is intentionally left blank.
AP-1
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
1
Menu
General
Ship &
Track
Routes
Own Ship COG/SOG Predictor (Distance, Time)
COG/SOG Predictor Length (1.00 NM)
COG/SOG Predictor Time (10 s, 30 s, 1 mn, 2 mn, 5 mn, 10 mn, 15 mn,
30 mn, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h)
Vessel Icon Orientation (Heading, COG)
Fuel Range Ring (ON, OFF)
Track Interval (1 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 1 mn, 5 mn, 10 mn)
Track Color (Fixed, Variable)
Fixed Color Setup (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan,
Black & White)
Variable Color (Depth, SST, Speed)
Variable Color Setup (Open the dialog box for variable color setting.)
Track Thickness (1 - 4; 2)
Automatic Track Deleting (ON, OFF)
Delete All Tracks
Reset Default Settings
Default Route Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange,
Cyan, Black & White)
Route Thickness (1 - 4; 2)
Navigate with AutoPilot (ON, OFF)
Ask to Enter Route Name (ON, OFF)
Great Circle Navigation (ON, OFF)
Fuel Max Range (ON, OFF)
Route Auto Zoom (ON, OFF)
Waypoint Switching Mode (Circle and Cross Line, Circle, Cross Line)
Switching Circle Radius (70 yd)
Waypoint Crossing Notification (ON, OFF)
End of Route Notification (ON, OFF)
Intelligent Route Waypoint Centering (ON, OFF)
Display XTE Lines (ON, OFF)
XTE Value (100 yd)
Default Planning Route Speed (5.0 kn)
Delete All Points & Routes
Reset Default Settings
RotoKeys (Base, Full)
Function Gesture (None, Screen Capture, Event, MOB, Home, Menu, Lists, Tide,
Fusion, Fusion Ctrl)
Connect to the Internet (Never, At Startup, When Necessary)
Wireless LAN Settings (Open the dialog box for Wireless LAN settings.)
Allow Remote Control (Off, View Only, Full Control)
Local Time Offset (UTC - 12:00 to UTC + 13:00)
Synchronize Time with GPS (ON, OFF)
NavData Transparency (0 - 80; 10%)
NavData Multi Data Dwell Time (2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s)
Camera Dwell Time (5 s, 10 s, 15 s)
User Interface Auto-Hide (2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s)
Synchronization Notification (ON, OFF)
Key Beep (ON, OFF)
Launch Demo Mode (Open the demo files list.)
Demo Slide Show (ON, OFF)
Manual Demo Heading (0 - 360; 45
°
)
Manual Demo Speed (0 - 20; 5 kn)
Language (English, Others)
Check for Software Update
Reset Default Settings
Maximum Dist. Between Waypoints
(50 - 1000; 200 NM)
Bold: Default setting
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-2
Day/Night Mode (Automatic, Day, Dusk, Night)
Chart Priority in Auto Mode (Vector, Raster)
Chart Boundaries (ON, OFF)
Display Raster Chart Unit Legend (ON, OFF)
Grid Interval (Off, Very Low, Low, Medium, High, Very High)
Tide/Current Icons Size (50 - 150; 100%)
PhotoFusion Transparency Offset (0 - 80; 0%)
Tidal Currents Transparency (0 - 80; 25%)
Depth Shading Transparency (0 - 80; 50%)
Radar Overlay Transparency (0 - 80; 25%)
Radar Overlay Source (Antenna Range1, Antenna Range2)
Radar Overlay Range link (ON, OFF)
Echo Color for Overlay (Multicolor, Green, Yellow)
Auto 3D Alti Exaggeration (ON, OFF)
3D Alti Exaggeration (1 - 50; 5)
Auto 3D Bathy Exaggeration (ON, OFF)
3D Bathy Exaggeration (1 - 50; 10)
Auto Depth Shading Color Scale (ON, OFF)
Depth Color Shade (ClassicHue, InvertedClassicHue, RedHue, BlueHue,
GreenHue, YellowHue)
Reset Default Settings
1
Display Points Names (ON, OFF)
Default Point Symbol (Select the default icon for point.)
Default Point Color
(Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black & White)
Point Size (50 - 200; 100%)
Icons Set (Classic, Modern)
Data to Be Recorded in Event Comment (None, Date, SST, Date And SST)
Add Screen Capture to Event (ON, OFF)
Event Configuration (Open the dialog box for event symbol and color settings.)
Delete All Points & Routes
Delete All Event Pictures
Reset Default Settings
1
Points
Plotter
Display
Vector
Chart
Minimum Value (0 ft)
Maximum Value (200 ft)
Chart Object Size (50 - 200; 100%)
Chart Color Palette (S-52, Standard, Sunlight)
Chart Symbols (S-52, International)
Shallow Contour (0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0 ft)
Safety Contour (0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0,
50.0, 70.0, 100, 200 ft)
Deep Contour (0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0,
50.0, 70.0, 100, 200, 300, 500, 1,000, 2,000 ft)
Text (Important) (ON, OFF)
Text (Other) (ON, OFF)
Display Buoy Names (ON, OFF)
Display Light Description (ON, OFF)
Display Light Sectors (ON, OFF)
Display Routes (ON, OFF)
Display Routes Bearings (ON, OFF)
Display Soundings (ON, OFF)
Display Soundings in Red (ON, OFF)
Display Obstructions Depth Below Safety (ON, OFF)
Display Seabed (ON, OFF)
Cautionary Areas (ON, OFF)
Reset Default Settings
Shallower than... (0.0, 3.0, 6.0, 9.0, 12.0, 15.0,
18.0, 21.0, 24.0, 27.0, 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, 100 ft)
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-3
S-52 Vector Chart Display Mode (Custom, Base, Standard, Other, Fishing)
Unknown Object (ON, OFF)
Chart Data Coverage (ON, OFF)
Water and Seabed Features (ON, OFF)
Traffic Routes (ON, OFF)
Information Areas (ON, OFF)
Buoys & Beacons (ON, OFF)
Lights (ON, OFF)
Fog Signals (ON, OFF)
Radar (ON, OFF)
Information About Chart Data (ON, OFF)
Obstructions (ON, OFF)
Depth Contours, Currents, Magnetics (ON, OFF)
Fishing Facilities (ON, OFF)
Services (Pilot, Signal Stations) (ON, OFF)
Harbour Facilities (ON, OFF)
Services and Small Craft Facilities (ON, OFF)
Land Features (ON, OFF)
Reset Default Settings
1
1
S-52
Display
Weather
Load Weather File (Open the dialog box to select the weather file to load.)
Weather Data Server (NavCenter, Sirius)
Sirius Weather Radar (USNowRadar, CanadianRadar)
Zone Forecast (BBWX2 only)
Marine Warnings (BBWX2 only)
Tropical Infos (BBWX2 only)
Sirius Diagnostic (BBWX2 only)
Tidal Step (5 mn, 10 mn, 15 mn, 20 mn, 30 mn, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 6 h, 12 h)
Duration of Animation (5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 30 s, 45 s, 1 mn, 2 mn, 3 mn)
Model (USA, Worldwide)
Forecast Days (1 - 16; 4)
Wind (ON, OFF)
Waves (ON, OFF)
Cloud (ON, OFF)
Rain/Snow (ON, OFF)
Air Temperature (ON, OFF)
Pressure (ON, OFF)
500mb (ON, OFF)
Sea Surface Temperature (ON, OFF)
Oceanic Currents (ON, OFF)
Altimetry (ON, OFF)
Plankton (ON, OFF)
Weather Color Transparency (0 - 80; 40%)
AUTO SST Color Scale (ON, OFF)
Reset Default Settings
Minimum Value (50
°
F)
Maximum Value (90
°
F)
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-4
Radar Source (Select the antenna host name.)
Day Background Color (Black, Dark Blue, White)
Night Background Color (Black, Dark Blue)
Echo Color (Multicolor, Green, Yellow)
Sweep Fade (ON, OFF)
Rings Interval (Auto, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Bearing Scale Mode (Relative, True)
EBL Reference (True, Relative)
Own Ship Icon (ON, OFF)
Watchman (5 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes)
Trail Color (Blue, Yellow, Green)
Trail Length (15 s, 30 s, 1 mn, 3 mn, 6 mn, 15 mn, 30 mn, Continuous)
Trail Shade (Single, Multi)
Trail Mode (Relative, True)
Antenna Rotation (Auto, 24 RPM)
Antenna Heading Align (-180 - +180; 0
°
)
Main Bang Suppression (0 - 100; 0)
Enable Sector (2) Blanking (ON, OFF)
Start Angle* (0 - 360; 0)
End Angle* (0 - 360; 0)
Antenna Height (For DRS: Under 3 m, 3 m - 10 m, Over 10 m)
(For IMO: 5 m, 7.5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m)
Antenna Longitudinal Position (20 ft)
Antenna Lateral Position (-Port) (0 ft)
Auto Tuning (ON, OFF)
Tuning Source (Range1, Range2)
Manual Tuning** (-50 - 50; 0)
Radar Monitoring (Open the radar monitor window.)
Radar Optimization
ARPA Advanced Settings (Open the dialog box for ARPA setting.)
Hardware Factory Default
Reset Default Settings
1
1
Radar
Targets
*: These are avialable when
[Enable Sector (2) Blanking] is [ON].
Display Target IDs (ON, OFF)
Hide AIS Targets Farther than ... (1 NM, 2 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM, 18 NM,
24 NM, 48 NM, 84 NM, 96 NM)
Ignore Alarms for AIS Slower than... (1 kn)
CPA/TCPA Alarm (ON, OFF)
CPA Alarm Value (0.5 NM)
TCPA Alarm Value (10 min)
Proximity AIS Target Alarm (ON, OFF)
Proximity AIS Target Alarm Value (100 yd)
Buddies List (AIS & DSC) (Open the buddies list.)
Reset Default Settings
**: This is available when
[Auto Tuning] is [OFF].
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-5
Fish Finder Source (DFF1/BBDS1, DFF3, FCV1150, DFF1-UHD)
Day Background Color (White, Light Blue, Black, Dark Blue)
Night Background Color (Black, Dark Blue)
Echo Color Levels (8 Colors, 16 Colors, 64 Colors)
A-Scope Peak Hold (ON, OFF)
Zoom Reference Lines (ON, OFF)
High Resolution (ON, OFF)
Picture Advance (4/1, 2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Stop)
Range Shift (0 - 999; 0)
Bottom Range Shift Area (15 - 85; 75%)
Zoom Range Span (30 ft)
Bottom Lock Range Span (30 ft)
ACCU-Fish Info (Depth, Fish Size)
ACCU-Fish Symbols (Off, Solid, Striped)
ACCU-Fish Size Correction (-80 - 100; 0%)
Heaving Correction (ON, OFF)
Interference Rejection (Off, Low, Medium, High, Auto)
Clutter (0 - 100; 0%)
TVG HF (0 - 9; 5)
TVG LF (0 - 9; 5)
Transmit Rate Auto (ON, OFF)
Transmit Rate Manual (0 - 21; 21)
Sounder Transmit (ON, OFF)
Fish Alarm (ON, OFF)
Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock (ON, OFF)
Fish Alarm Level (Low, Medium, High)
Zero line Rejection (ON, OFF)
Zero line Range (1.4 - 2.5; 2.0)
Transducer Draft (3.0 ft)
Salt Water (ON, OFF)
Fish Finder Source (DFF1/BBDS1, DFF3, FCV1150, DFF1-UHD)
Transducer Setup (Open the dialog box for transducer setting.)
Transmission Power (0 - 10; 10)
External KP (ON, OFF)
Bottom Level HF (-40 - +40)
Bottom Level LF (-40 - +40)
Gain Offset HF (-50 - +50)
Gain Offset LF (-50 - +50)
Auto Gain Offset HF (-5 - +5)
Auto Gain Offset LF (-5 - +5)
STC HF (0 - 10)
STC LF (0 - 10)
Frequency Adjust HF (-50 - +50)
Frequency Adjust LF (-50 - +50)
TX Pulse HF (Short1, Short2, Standard
, Long)
TX Pulse LF (Short1, Short2, Standard, Long)
RX Band HF (Narrow, Standard, Wide)
RX Band LF (Narrow, Standard, Wide)
Temperature Port (MJ Port, Low Frequency, High Frequency)
Sounder Demo Mode (Off, Shallow, Deep)
Hardware Factory Default
Reset Default Settings
1
1
Sounder
Range Minimum Value (0.0 ft)
Range Maximum Value (3.0 ft)
Range Minimum Value (0.0 ft)
Range Maximum Value (3.0 ft)
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-6
Alarm
Files
Units
1
Export File Format (TZD, CSV, GPX, KML)
Import Points & Routes (Open the dialog box for import.)
Export All Points & Routes (Open the dialog box for export.)
Import Tracks (Open the dialog box for import.)
Export Tracks (Open the dialog box for export.)
Import from NN3D (Open the dialog box for import.)
Export to NN3D (Open the dialog box for export.)
BackUp Settings (Open the dialog box for backup.)
Restore Settings (Open the dialog box for restoring.)
Clone SD-Card (Open the dialog box for clone.)
Clean Points, Routes & Tracks
Bearing Display (Magnetic, True)
True Wind Calculation Reference (Ground, Surface)
Position Format (DDD
°
MM.mmmm’, DDD
°
MM.mmm’, DDD
°
MM.mm’,
DDD
°
MM’SS.ss”, DDD.dddddd
°
, Loran-C, MGRS)
Loran C Station & GRI (Open the dialog box for Loran C configuration.)
Range (Long) (Nautical Mile, Kilometer, Mile)
Range (Short) (Foot, Meter, Yard)
Short/Long Change Over (0.0 - 2.0; 0.5 NM)
Depth (Foot, Meter, Fathom, Passi Braza)
Height/Length (Foot, Meter)
Temperature (Fahrenheit Degree, Celsius Degree)
Boat Speed (Knot, Kilometer per Hour, Mile per Hour, Meter per Second)
Wind Speed (Knot, Kilometer per Hour, Mile per Hour, Meter per Second)
Atmospheric Pressure (HectoPascal, Millibar, Millimeter of Mercury, Inch of
Mercury)
Oil Pressure (KiloPascal, Bar, Pound per Square Inch)
Volume (Gallon, Liter)
Reset Default Settings
Hardware Alarm (ON, OFF)
XTE Alarm (ON, OFF)
Depth Alarm (ON, OFF)
Depth Alarm Value (30 ft)
Sea Surface Temperature Alarm (Off, Over, Under, Within, Out of)
Temperature Alarm Value (70.00
°
F)
Temperature Alarm Range Minimum Value (60.00
°
F)
Temperature Alarm Range Maximum Value (70.00
°
F)
Speed Alarm (Off, Under, Over)
Speed Alarm Value (10.0 kn)
Speed Alarm Output (ON, OFF)
Anchor Watch Alarm (ON, OFF)
Anchor Watch Alarm Value (50 yd)
Notification Sound (Off, Sound 1, Sound 2, Sound 3)
Alarm Sound (Off, Sound 1, Sound 2, Sound 3)
Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged (ON, OFF)
External Volume (0 - 100; 50)
Reset Default Settings
1
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
AP-7
Camera
Initial Setup (For serviceman)
1
Video Display (Stretch, Fit)
Analog Camera 1 or 2
IP Camera 1 to 4
Axis Server 241Q/Second Axis Server 241Q
FLIR Installation
Reset Default Settings
Video Format (PAL, NTSC)
NickName (Camera 1 (or 2))
NickName (IP Camera 1 to 4)
IP Camera (172.31.200.3 to 6)
PTZ Control (ON, OFF)
Server 241Q (ON, OFF)
IP Server
Quad Mode (ON, OFF)
Input 1 to 4 (ON, OFF)
NickName Input 1 to 4 (Video 1 to 4)
Scan IP
FLIR IP
Video Source (NickName Camera 1, Others)
Camera Offset (Right-left) (0
°
)
Camera Offset (Up-Down) (0
°
)
Automatic Zoom (ON, OFF)
Zoom Distance (300 ft)
Camera Altitude (30 ft)
Automatic Lock On Active Waypoint (ON, OFF)
Automatic Lock On MOB (ON, OFF)
AP-8
APPENDIX 2 RADIO REGULATORY
INFORMATION
Wireless Interoperability
This product is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct
sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio
technology and to comply with the following standards.
IEEE Std 802.11b Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN
IEEE Std 802.11g Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN
IEEE Std 802.11n Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN
Safety
This product, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of
energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other
wireless devices such as mobile phones. This product operates within the guidelines found in ra-
dio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations
reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and com-
mittees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In
some situations or environments, the use of this product may be restricted by the proprietor of the
building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situa-
tions include the following:
Using this product onboard airplanes, or
Using this product in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or
services is perceived or identified as being harmful.
If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or
environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use this product before turning it
on.
Export Regulation
Radio wave certification is necessary at the export destination. The Wireless LAN of this product
operates in the 2.4 GHz band, which does not require a license in most countries. However, the
conditions for use of the wireless LAN depend on the country or the area.
APPENDIX 2 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION
AP-9
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Below are descriptions for built-in Wireless LAN module.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the in-
terference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connect-
ed.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away
from person's body.
This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
APPENDIX 2 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION
AP-10
Canada-Industry Canada (IC)
Below are descriptions for built-in Wireless LAN module.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of this device.
L'utilization de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes :
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et
(2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si
ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fomctionnement du dispositif.
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ-
ment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should
be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un envi-
ronnement non contr êolé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques
(RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit etre installé et utilise en gardant une distance de 20
cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so
chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for
successful communication.
FURUNO
TZT9
SP - 1 E4470S01K
SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TZT9
1 GENERAL
1.1 Display 9-inch wide color LCD, 196.8 x 118.08 mm
1.2 Resolution 800 x 480 dots (WVGA)
1.3 Indication system Raster-scan, non-interlace, Horizontal: 31.7kHz, Vertical: 60Hz
1.4 Brightness 900 cd/m
2
typical
1.5 Display colors 262,144 colors (plotter), 64 colors (echo), 16 colors (radar)
2 PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1 Display mode Course plot, NAV data
2.2 Projection Mercator
2.3 Usable area 85° latitude or below
2.4 Memory capacity Track: 30,000 points, Point: 30,000 points
Route: 200 courses w/ 500 waypoints each
ARPA: 100 targets, AIS: 100 targets
2.5 MOB 1 point
3 RADAR INDICATION
3.1 Orientation mode Head-up, North-up (heading data required)
3.2 Echo trail 15/30s, 1/3/6/15/30 min. and continuous
4 OTHER FUNCTIONS
4.1 Sounder mode Echo sounder data required
4.2 Instrument data display Weather sensor, Engine monitoring sensor or other instruments
required
4.3 Camera monitor IP camera or NTSC/PAL data required
4.4 Language Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, UK/US
4.5 Alarms Notification, Anchor watch, Cross track error, CPA/TCPA*,
Proximity, Ship’s speed under/over*, Sea surface temperature*,
Depth*, Fish*, Bottom lock fish*, Hardware
*: External data required
5 INTERFACE
5.1 Number of port
LAN 1 ports, Ethernet 100Base-TX
CAN bus 1 port
USB 1 ports, USB2.0
Video output 1 ports, DVI-D, VESA DDC
Video input 2 ports, NTSC/PAL
FURUNO
TZT9
SP - 2 E4470S01K
SD card slot 2 slots
Line out 1 port
5.2 Wireless LAN IEEE802.11b/g/n
Transmitting frequency 2.412 to 2.462 GHz
Output power 12 dBm max.
5.3 NMEA0183 (Ver2.0) sentences (Ethernet)
Input/Output CUR, DPT, GGA, GSA, GSV, HDG, HDT, MDA, MTW, MWV,
RSA, ROT, VDM, VHW, VTG, XDR, ZDA
5.4 CAN bus PGN (NMEA2000)
Input 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 065280, 126208/720/992/996,
127237/245/250/251/257/488/489/505, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/038/039/040/041/538/540/793/794/798,
129808/809/810
,
130306/310/311/312/313/314/577/578
Output 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 126208/464/720/992/996,
127250/251/257/258, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/283/284/285, 130306/310/312/313/314
6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Multi function display 12-24 VDC: 3.5-1.8 A
6.2 Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C (wireless LAN: 0°C to +55°C)
7.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at 40°C
7.3 Degree of protection IP56 (w/ connector cover), IP22 (w/ connector boot)
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4
8 UNIT COLOR
N2.5 (fixed)
FURUNO
TZT14
SP - 3 E4471S01K
SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TZT14
1 GENERAL
1.1 Display 14.1-inch wide color LCD, 303.36 x 189.6 mm
1.2 Resolution 1280 x 800 dots (WXGA)
1.3 Indication system Raster-scan, non-interlace, Horizontal: 49.4kHz, Vertical: 59.92Hz
1.4 Brightness 900 cd/m
2
typical
1.5 Display colors 262,144 colors (plotter), 64 colors (echo), 16 colors (radar)
2 PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1 Display mode Course plot, NAV data
2.2 Projection Mercator
2.3 Usable area 85° latitude or below
2.4 Memory capacity Track: 30,000 points, Point: 30,000 points
Route: 200 courses w/ 500 waypoints each
ARPA: 100 targets, AIS: 100 targets
2.5 MOB 1 point
3 RADAR INDICATION
3.1 Orientation mode Head-up, North-up (heading data required)
3.2 Echo trail 15/30s, 1/3/6/15/30 min. and continuous
4 OTHER FUNCTIONS
4.1 Sounder mode Echo sounder data required
4.2 Instrument data display Weather sensor, Engine monitoring sensor or other instruments
required
4.3 Camera monitor IP camera or NTSC/PAL data required
4.4 Language Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, UK/US
4.5 Alarms Notification, Anchor watch, Cross track error, CPA/TCPA*,
Proximity, Ship’s speed under/over*, Sea surface temperature*,
Depth*, Fish*, Bottom lock fish*, Hardware
*: External data required
5 INTERFACE
5.1 Number of port
LAN 3 ports, Ethernet 100Base-TX
CAN bus 1 port
USB 1 ports, USB2.0
Video output 1 ports, DVI-D, VESA DDC
Video input 2 ports, NTSC/PAL
FURUNO
TZT14
SP - 4 E4471S01K
SD card slot 2 slots
Line out 1 port
5.2 Wireless LAN IEEE802.11b/g/n
Transmitting frequency 2.412 to 2.462 GHz
Output power 12 dBm max.
5.3 NMEA0183 (Ver2.0) sentences (Ethernet)
Input/Output CUR, DPT, GGA, GSA, GSV, HDG, HDT, MDA, MTW, MWV,
RSA, ROT, VDM, VHW, VTG, XDR, ZDA
5.4 CAN bus PGN (NMEA2000)
Input 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 065280, 126208/720/992/996,
127237/245/250/251/257/488/489/505, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/038/039/040/041/538/540/793/794/798,
129808/809/810
,
130306/310/311/312/313/314/577/578
Output 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 126208/464/720/992/996,
127250/251/257/258, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/283/284/285, 130306/310/312/313/314
6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Multi function display 12-24 VDC: 5.0-2.5 A
6.2 Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C (wireless LAN: 0°C to +55°C)
7.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at 40°C
7.3 Degree of protection IP56 (w/ connector cover), IP22 (w/ connector boot)
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4
8 UNIT COLOR
N2.5 (fixed)
FURUNO
TZTBB
SP - 5 E4472S01C
SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TZTBB
1 EXTERNAL MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS (REQUIRED)
1.1 Display screen Color LCD with touch panel control
1.2 Resolution 1920 x 1200 dots max.
Horizontal resolution: 1280 or more recommended
1.3 Maximum frequency 165 MHz, DVI single link
1.4 Signal interface Picture: DVI-D, VESA DDC,
Touch panel: USB2.0, Windows
®
7 multi-touch
(The driver installation should not be required)
2 PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1 Display mode Course plot, NAV data
2.2 Projection Mercator
2.3 Usable area 85° latitude or below
2.4 Memory capacity Track: 30,000 points, Point: 30,000 points
Route: 200 courses w/ 500 waypoints each
ARPA: 100 targets, AIS: 100 targets
2.5 MOB 1 point
2.6 Picture colors 262,144 colors
3 RADAR INDICATION
3.1 Orientation mode Head-up, North-up (heading data required)
3.2 Echo trail 15/30s, 1/3/6/15/30 min. and continuous
3.3 Picture colors 16 colors
4 OTHER FUNCTIONS
4.1 Sounder mode Picture 64 colors (echo sounder data required)
4.2 Instrument data display Weather sensor, Engine monitoring sensor or other instruments
required
4.3 Camera monitor IP camera or NTSC/PAL data required
4.4 Language Chinese, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Italian,
Japanese, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, UK/US
4.5 Alarms Notification, Anchor watch, Cross track error, CPA/TCPA*,
Proximity, Ship’s speed under/over*, Sea surface temperature*,
Depth*, Fish*, Bottom lock fish*, Hardware
*: External data required
5 INTERFACE
5.1 Number of port
LAN 3 ports, Ethernet 100Base-TX
FURUNO
TZTBB
SP - 6 E4472S01C
CAN bus 1 port
USB 6 ports, USB2.0 (includes 1 port for wireless LAN module)
Video output 2 ports, DVI-D, VESA DDC
Video input 2 ports, NTSC/PAL
SD card slot 2 slots (SDXC applicable)
Line out 1 port
5.2 Wireless LAN IEEE802.11b/g/n
Transmitting frequency 2.412 to 2.462 GHz
Output power 12 dBm max.
5.3 NMEA0183 (Ver2.0) sentences (Ethernet)
Input/Output CUR, DPT, GGA, GSA, GSV, HDG, HDT, MDA, MTW, MWV,
RSA, ROT, VDM, VHW, VTG, XDR, ZDA
5.4 CAN bus PGN (NMEA2000)
Input 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 065280, 126208/720/992/996,
127237/245/250/251/257/258/488/489/505, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/038/039/040/041/291/538/540/793/794/798,
129808/809/810
,
130306/310/311/312/313/314/577/578
Output 059392/904, 060928, 061184, 126208/464/720/992/996,
127250/251/257/258, 128259/267,
129025/026/029/033/283/284/285, 130306/310/312/313/314
6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Processor unit 12-24 VDC: 3.6-1.8 A (includes switch box)
6.2 Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C (wireless LAN: 0°C to +55°C)
7.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at 40°C
7.3 Degree of protection
Processor unit IP22
Switch box IP56 (front panel), IP22 (chassis)
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4
8 UNIT COLOR
N2.5 (fixed)
IN-1
INDEX
Numerics
3D display
description ............................................... 3-1
exaggeration ........................................... 3-2
A
ACCU-FISH
TM
considerations ....................................... 7-13
setting.................................................... 7-14
Advanced weather data .......................... 11-7
AIS
ignoring ................................................. 12-3
list .......................................................... 12-5
lost target .............................................. 12-2
showing/hiding ...................................... 12-1
target data ............................................. 12-4
target IDs............................................... 12-4
target symbols ....................................... 12-1
Alarms
anchor watch ......................................... 2-13
CPA/TCPA (ARPA) ............................... 6-25
depth ..................................................... 2-11
fish finder............................................... 7-11
hardware ............................................... 2-13
proximity AIS target ............................... 12-2
speed .................................................... 2-12
SST ....................................................... 2-12
XTE ....................................................... 2-11
Analog camera .......................................... 9-2
Anchor watch alarm ................................ 2-13
Animation radar....................................... 11-8
ARPA
acquiring target manually ...................... 6-22
cancelling tracking target ...................... 6-24
clearing lost target ................................. 6-24
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 6-25
showing/hiding ...................................... 6-22
target data ............................................. 6-24
A-scope display......................................... 7-5
Axis Server 241Q ...................................... 9-3
B
Background color
fish finder............................................... 7-16
radar ...................................................... 6-17
Bearing measurement
chart ........................................................ 2-5
radar ............................................... 6-6
, 6-10
Boat icon
configuration.......................................... 1-22
description ............................................... 2-3
radar ...................................................... 6-17
Bottom discrimination display.................... 7-6
Bottom lock display ................................... 7-4
Bottom range shift area ........................... 7-17
Bottom zoom display ................................. 7-4
Buddies list .............................................. 12-6
C
Camera/Video
cycling inputs........................................... 9-5
cycling period .......................................... 9-5
image adjustment .................................... 9-6
image size ............................................... 9-4
input source............................................. 9-2
showing ................................................... 9-1
Chart object information ............................ 2-6
Chart scale ................................................ 2-2
Chart type.................................................. 2-1
Clutter (fish finder)..................................... 7-8
COG/SOG predictor .................................. 2-4
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................... 6-25
D
Data area (data box)
cycling data ........................................... 1-16
description ............................................. 1-13
setting.................................................... 1-14
transparency ......................................... 1-17
Depth alarm............................................. 2-11
Depth shading overlay .............................. 3-3
Display
chart ........................................................ 1-9
radar ...................................................... 1-10
selecting .................................................. 1-6
sounder (fish finder) .............................. 1-11
Display brilliance ....................................... 1-6
Display selection window ........................ 13-8
DSC
description ............................................. 1-27
information ............................................ 1-27
list .......................................................... 1-28
Dual frequency display.............................. 7-3
Dual range radar ..................................... 6-18
E
EBL ........................................................... 6-9
Echo average .......................................... 6-15
Echo color (radar) ................................... 6-17
Echo stretch ............................................ 6-15
Echo trails
clearing.................................................. 6-13
color ...................................................... 6-14
length .................................................... 6-13
mode (reference)................................... 6-14
shade .................................................... 6-15
showing/hiding ...................................... 6-13
Event mark ................................................ 4-2
F
FA-30, FA-50........................................... 1-26
INDEX
IN-2
Fan replacement ......................................14-3
FAR-2xx7 series ......................................6-19
FAX-30.....................................................1-25
FCV-1150.................................................7-19
File format ..................................................8-2
Files menu .................................................8-1
Fish finder alarm
activating/deactivating............................7-12
sensitivity................................................7-13
setting.....................................................7-11
Fish finder operation
automatic..................................................7-6
manual mode ...........................................7-7
FLIR camera ...................................... 9-4
, 9-6
Flyover .....................................................5-11
Fuel level..................................................5-15
Function gesture ......................................1-20
Fuse replacement ....................................14-2
FUSION-Link..............................................9-8
G
Gain
fish finder..................................................7-8
radar.........................................................6-2
General menu ........................................13-10
Guard zone ..............................................6-11
H
Hardware alarm .......................................2-13
Heading line
chart .........................................................2-3
radar.......................................................6-10
I
Instrument display
engine ....................................................10-2
selecting.................................................10-1
showing..................................................10-1
steering ..................................................10-2
tank level................................................10-3
weather ..................................................10-3
wind........................................................10-4
Interference
fish finder..................................................7-9
radar.......................................................6-11
IP camera...................................................9-3
K
Key beep........................................ 1-2, 13-11
Key control description...............................1-2
L
Language selection ..................................1-21
LCD replacement .....................................14-3
Lithium battery replacement.....................14-2
M
Magnetron replacement ...........................14-3
Main menu operation .................................1-1
Maintenance ............................................14-1
Menu introduction ....................................1-17
Menu tree................................................AP-1
MOB.........................................................1-22
Multiple chart displays................................2-7
N
NAVpilot-700 series .................................2-21
Notification
end of route............................................5-14
waypoint arrival ......................................5-14
O
Orientation mode
chart .........................................................2-2
radar.........................................................6-5
Overlay range link ....................................6-18
P
Picture advance speed ..............................7-9
Points
deleting............................................. 4-5
, 8-6
editing.......................................................4-6
finding on chart.......................................4-10
going to ..................................................4-10
information ...............................................4-2
list.............................................................4-8
moving......................................................4-5
placing......................................................4-1
restarting navigation...............................4-14
setting.......................................................4-3
showing/hiding .......................................4-10
stopping navigation ................................4-14
Pop-up menus..........................................1-13
Power on/off...............................................1-5
Proximity AIS target alarm .......................12-2
R
Racon.......................................................6-22
Radar overlay.............................................3-6
Radio regulatory information ...................AP-8
Rain clutter.................................................6-4
Range measurement
chart .........................................................2-5
radar............................................... 6-6
, 6-10
Range rings................................................6-6
Range scale
fish finder..................................................7-7
radar.........................................................6-4
RotoKey
TM
menu operation ........................................1-1
menus ....................................................1-12
mode ............................................ 13-1
, 13-7
Routes
auto zoom at arrival at go to point..........5-13
color .......................................................5-16
creating ....................................................5-1
deleting............................................. 5-8
, 8-6
deleting points or route points..................5-4
detailed information...............4-14
, 5-6, 5-11
extending..................................................5-4
finding on chart.........................................5-7
INDEX
IN-3
following .................................................. 5-8
following in reverse direction................. 5-12
inserting route points............................... 5-3
joining points ........................................... 5-7
list............................................................ 5-5
moving route points................................. 5-3
removing points....................................... 5-4
restarting navigation.............................. 5-12
showing/hiding ........................................ 5-8
skipping a go to point ............................ 5-12
splitting .................................................... 5-5
stop following ........................................ 5-12
S
S-52 display menu .................................... 2-9
SART....................................................... 6-22
Satellite photo overlay............................... 3-5
SD cards
care of ..................................................... 1-7
copying equipment settings..................... 8-6
description............................................... 1-7
exporting points and routes..................... 8-3
formatting ................................................ 1-7
importing or exporting tracks................... 8-4
importing points and routes..................... 8-3
inserting................................................... 1-7
loading equipment settings ..................... 8-5
removing ................................................. 1-7
saving equipment settings....................... 8-5
Sea clutter ................................................. 6-3
Single frequency display ........................... 7-2
Software update ...................................... 1-33
Speed alarm............................................ 2-12
SST alarm ............................................... 2-12
Stand-by radar .......................................... 6-1
Sweep fade ............................................. 6-16
System configuration................................... xii
T
Tidal current graph .................................. 3-10
Tidal current overlay.................................. 3-9
Tide graph ................................................. 3-8
Tide icon overlay ....................................... 3-7
Touch control description ...................1-3
, 9-7
Track
color ...................................................... 2-15
deleting.................................................. 2-18
interval................................................... 2-15
recording ............................................... 2-19
removing saved..................................... 2-19
replaying saved ..................................... 2-19
showing/hiding ...................................... 2-15
thickness ............................................... 2-18
trackback............................................... 2-19
Tracks
deleting.................................................... 8-6
Transmitting radar ..................................... 6-1
Troubleshooting
chart ...................................................... 14-5
fish finder............................................... 14-5
general .................................................. 14-4
radar...................................................... 14-4
Tuning ....................................................... 6-1
TVG......................................................... 7-11
U
Units menu ............................................ 13-12
V
Vector chart menu..................................... 2-8
VRM .......................................................... 6-8
W
Watchman ............................................... 6-12
Waypoint switching mode ....................... 5-13
Weather
500mb description............................... 11-11
air temperature forecast ...................... 11-12
altimetry forecast................................. 11-12
buoys................................................... 11-12
city forecast ......................................... 11-13
cloud forecast...................................... 11-10
current forecast ................................... 11-12
icons overview....................................... 11-8
lightning............................................... 11-13
NavCenter ............................................. 11-2
plankton forecast................................. 11-12
pressure forecast................................. 11-11
rain forecast ........................................ 11-10
showing display..................................... 11-1
Sirius ..................................................... 11-6
SST description................................... 11-10
storm cast............................................ 11-13
storm tracks......................................... 11-14
waves forecast .................................... 11-10
wind forecast ......................................... 11-9
Weather radar ......................................... 11-7
Weather reports .................................... 11-14
Wireless LAN settings ............................. 1-29
X
XTE alarm ............................................... 2-11
XTE lines................................................. 5-14
Z
Zero line .................................................. 7-21
Zoom reference lines .............................. 7-16
FURUNO Worldwide Warranty for Pleasure Boats (Except North America)
This warranty is valid for products manufactured by Furuno
Electric Co. (hereafter FURUNO) and installed on a pleasure
boat. Any web based purchases that are imported into other
countries by anyone other than a FURUNO certified dealer may
not comply with local standards. FURUNO strongly recommends
against importing these products from international websites as
the imported product may not work correctly and may interfere
with other electronic devices. The imported product may also be
in breach of the local laws and mandated technical requirements.
Products imported into other countries as described previously
shall not be eligible for local warranty service.
For products purchased outside of your country please contact
the national distributor of Furuno products in the country where
purchased.
This warranty is in addition to the customer´s statutory legal
rights.
1. Terms and Conditions of Warranty
FURUNO guarantees that each new FURUNO product is the
result of quality materials and workmanship. The warranty is
valid for a period of 2 years (24 months) from the date of the
invoice, or the date of commissioning of the product by the
installing certified dealer.
2. FURUNO Standard Warranty
The FURUNO standard warranty covers spare parts and labour
costs associated with a warranty claim, provided that the product
is returned to a FURUNO national distributor by prepaid carrier.
The FURUNO standard warranty includes:
Repair at a FURUNO national distributor
All spare parts for the repair
Cost for economical shipment to customer
3. FURUNO Onboard Warranty
If the product was installed/commissioned and registered by a
certified FURUNO dealer, the customer has the right to the
onboard warranty.
The FURUNO onboard warranty includes
Free shipping of the necessary parts
Labour: Normal working hours only
Travel time: Up to a maximum of two (2) hours
Travel distance: Up to a maximum of one hundred
and sixty (160) KM by car for the complete journey
4. Warranty Registration
For the Standard Warranty - presentation of product with serial
number (8 digits serial number, 1234-5678) is sufficient.
Otherwise, the invoice with serial number, name and stamp of
the dealer and date of purchase is shown.
For the Onboard Warranty your FURUNO certified dealer will
take care of all registrations.
5. Warranty Claims
For the Standard Warranty - simply send the defective product
together with the invoice to a FURUNO national distributor.
For the Onboard Warranty – contact a FURUNO national
distributor or a certified dealer. Give the product´s serial number
and describe the problem as accurately as possible.
Warranty repairs carried out by companies/persons other than a
FURUNO national distributor or a certified dealer is not covered
by this warranty.
6. Warranty Limitations
When a claim is made, FURUNO has a right to choose whether
to repair the product or replace it.
The FURUNO warranty is only valid if the product was correctly
installed and used. Therefore, it is necessary for the customer to
comply with the instructions in the handbook. Problems which
result from not complying with the instruction manual are not
covered by the warranty.
FURUNO is not liable for any damage caused to the vessel by
using a FURUNO product.
The following are excluded from this warranty:
a. Second-hand product
b. Underwater unit such as transducer and hull unit
c. Routine maintenance, alignment and calibration
services.
d. Replacement of consumable parts such as fuses,
lamps, recording papers, drive belts, cables, protective
covers and batteries.
e. Magnetron and MIC with more than 1000 transmitting
hours or older than 12 months, whichever comes first.
f. Costs associated with the replacement of a transducer
(e.g. Crane, docking or diver etc.).
g. Sea trial, test and evaluation or other demonstrations.
h. Products repaired or altered by anyone other than the
FURUNO national distributor or an authorized dealer.
i. Products on which the serial number is altered,
defaced or removed.
j. Problems resulting from an accident, negligence,
misuse, improper installation, vandalism or water
penetration.
k. Damage resulting from a force majeure or other natural
catastrophe or calamity.
l. Damage from shipping or transit.
m. Software updates, except when deemed necessary
and warrantable by FURUNO.
n. Overtime, extra labour outside of normal hours such as
weekend/holiday, and travel costs above the 160 KM
allowance
o. Operator familiarization and orientation.
FURUNO Electric Company, March 1, 2011
FURUNO Warranty for North America
FURUNO U.S.A., Limited Warranty provides a twenty-four (24) months LABOR and twenty-four (24) months PARTS
warranty on products from the date of installation or purchase by the original owner. Products or components that are
represented as being waterproof are guaranteed to be waterproof only for, and within the limits, of the warranty
period stated above. The warranty start date may not exceed eighteen (18) months from the original date of purchase
by dealer from Furuno USA and applies to new equipment installed and operated in accordance with Furuno USA’s
published instructions.
Magnetrons and Microwave devices will be warranted for a period of 12 months from date of original equipment
installation.
Furuno U.S.A., Inc. warrants each new product to be of sound material and workmanship and through its authorized
dealer will exchange any parts proven to be defective in material or workmanship under normal use at no charge for a
period of 24 months from the date of installation or purchase.
Furuno U.S.A., Inc., through an authorized Furuno dealer will provide labor at no cost to replace defective parts,
exclusive of routine maintenance or normal adjustments, for a period of 24 months from installation date provided the
work is done by Furuno U.S.A., Inc. or an AUTHORIZED Furuno dealer during normal shop hours and within a radius
of 50 miles of the shop location.
A suitable proof of purchase showing date of purchase, or installation certification must be available to Furuno U.S.A.,
Inc., or its authorized dealer at the time of request for warranty service.
This warranty is valid for installation of products manufactured by Furuno Electric Co. (hereafter FURUNO). Any
purchases from brick and mortar or web-based resellers that are imported into other countries by anyone other than a
FURUNO certified dealer, agent or subsidiary may not comply with local standards. FURUNO strongly recommends
against importing these products from international websites or other resellers, as the imported product may not work
correctly and may interfere with other electronic devices. The imported product may also be in breach of the local
laws and mandated technical requirements. Products imported into other countries, as described previously, shall not
be eligible for local warranty service.
For products purchased outside of your country please contact the national distributor of Furuno products in the
country where purchased.
WARRANTY REGISTRATION AND INFORMATION
To register your product for warranty, as well as see the complete warranty guidelines and limitations, please visit
www.furunousa.com
and click on “Support”. In order to expedite repairs, warranty service on Furuno equipment is
provided through its authorized dealer network. If this is not possible or practical, please contact Furuno U.S.A., Inc.
to arrange warranty service.
FURUNO U.S.A., INC.
Attention: Service Coordinator
4400 N.W. Pacific Rim Boulevard
Camas, WA 98607-9408
Telephone: (360) 834-9300
FAX: (360) 834-9400
Furuno U.S.A., Inc. is proud to supply you with the highest quality in Marine Electronics. We know you had several
choices when making your selection of equipment, and from everyone at Furuno we thank you. Furuno takes great
pride in customer service.
225


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Furuno TZTBB at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Furuno TZTBB in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 34,3 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Furuno TZTBB

Furuno TZTBB User Manual - English - 16 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info